Nissan - Pathfinder - Workshop Manual - 2002 - 2002

Page 862 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 464 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Connector Locations Battery / Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Harness Connector Page 4320 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Oil Filter / Crankshaft Pulley / Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Harness Connector Oil Pan / Crankshaft Position Sensor Harness Connector Service and Repair Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core / Evaporator Core Nissan does not provide any specific information on the removal or service of these components. Refer to component diagrams or exploded views for information regarding these components. No other information is available at this time. Page 4287 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3525 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5184 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 736 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5521 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2551 Step 31 Page 4429 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 670 Description Part 1 Page 3960 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4856 Part 6 Page 1027 Part 1 Page 860 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1984 Lubricant Adjusting Procedure For Compressor Replacement Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl.oz, 0.2 Imp fl.oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor. Page 5409 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4238 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4427 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5540 EC-TP/SW-01 Page 3040 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2531 Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Page 4035 Step 7 - 10 Page 196 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1189 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Components Locations Overall View Overall View Page 534 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Replacement For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to "Installation - Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable". - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screw. - Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel guide pins with the screws which secure the combination switch as shown in the figure. Page 2712 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2028 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Screw Jack Screw Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 3526 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2963 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 570 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5247 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1039 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1962 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Power Steering Fluid Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent *6 6*: Genuine NISSAN PSF, Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid, DEXRON (TM) III, MERCON (TM), or equivalent ATF may also be used. Page 3834 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3806 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3969 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1192 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 88 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component please refer to Instrument Panel; Service and Repair. Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Page 184 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2812 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Procedures Timing Chain: Procedures POSITION FOR APPLYING LIQUID GASKET Refer to Engine; Service Precautions; Technician Safety Information. Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. CAUTION: After removing timing chain, do not turn crankshaft and camshaft separately, or valves will strike piston heads. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets and crankshaft pulley. - Before disconnecting fuel hose, release fuel pressure. - Be careful not to damage sensor edges. - Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. Page 4800 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 5295 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1832 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve slearance Intake Cold 0.26 - 0.34 mm Hot (reference data) 0.304 - 0.416 mm Approximately 80 deg C Exhaust Cold 0.29 - 0.37 mm Hot (reference data) 0.308 - 0.432 mm Page 419 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5816 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3076 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3265 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2909 Page 3605 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Classification: TE02-001a Reference: NTB02-011a Date: March 11, 2002 ESSENTIAL TOOL: ENGINE COOLANT REFILL TOOL This bulletin amends NTB02-011. This version has the addition of a Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION If for any reason the vehicle's cooling system needs to be filled with coolant due to a service repair or maintenance, use the Coolant Refill Tool # J-45695. ^ Using this tool properly will ensure complete filling without trapped air bubbles in the cooling system. ^ Air pockets in the cooling system can cause: A) Overheating B) Poor heater performance C) Gurgling noise from the heater core To ensure the tool is used correctly, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool and the Service Procedure in this Bulletin. Page 1933 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Changing M/T Oil 1. Drain oil from drain plug and refill with new gear oil. 2. Check oil level. Oil grade and viscosity: API. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants", "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Oil capacity: 5.1 l ( (10-3/4 US pt, 9 Imp pt) Drain plug: Tightening Torque: 25 - 34 N.m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18-25 ft-lb) Page 3291 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 864 EC-KS-01 Connector Views Page 4691 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5571 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5240 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4532 Part 3 Page 4996 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2318 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 5268 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3877 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5334 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 731 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 892 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2111 6. Reinstall the brake caliper assemblies. ^ Refer to the ESM for brake caliper installation instructions. Install new front pads and hardware kit 7. Replace the brake pads and hardware with the new ones listed in the Parts Information (see Figures 4 and 5). ^ Refer to the ESM for brake pad and hardware kit replacement instructions. ^ Use PBC grease between the brake pad, shim, and caliper piston to reduce potential noise. Do Not get grease on the brake pad surface. ^ (Brake pads and hardware shown for one side. Kit includes parts for both sides) ^ Install only one "V-spring" on each side as shown in Figure 5. 8. Reinstall the wheels and lug nuts. Tighten lug nuts to 87 - 108 ft-lb with a Torque Wrench. Page 590 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3102 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2672 4. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. 5. Return the crankshaft pulley to its original position by turning it 20° forward. 6. Install timing chain tensioner, then remove the stopper pin. ^ When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. ^ After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. 7. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal. Page 739 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5140 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4762 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5706 Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Page 4230 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3689 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. Page 5340 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2103 ^ Do Not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact wrench. ^ Uneven or high torque applied to the lugs may "distort" the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. Burnish the brake pads 9. Burnish the brake pads as follow: A. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). B. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. C. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. D. Repeat steps A, B and C 3 to 5 times to complete the burnishing process. Rotor Indexing When installing a new rotor, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor runout is achieved. 1. Ensure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor to hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs. 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub (see Figure 6). 4. Measure rotor runout with a dial indicator (see Figure 7). ^ If the runout is above 0.03 mm (0.001), continue with step 5. NOTE: Runout specification is new, and is slightly less than what is shown in the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs. ^ Repeat step 4 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After finding the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than 0.03 mm (0.001 in), the new rotors must be turned (resurfaced). See step 4 in the Service Procedure. Page 1230 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3122 Type Of Standardized Relays Locations Thermal Transmitter Connector Page 1489 EC-KS-01 Connector Views Page 1965 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Fluid Leakage Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60 to 80°C (140 to 176°F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid. Page 1173 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2985 Part 4 Page 4946 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 33 7. Insert the Program CD-ROM (label-side up) into the CD slot (see Figure 3). 8. Gently move the display upward to close it. 9. Use the up/down arrow to choose the latest program CD-ROM upgrade number (WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33J), then touch this number (on the screen) to select it. See Figure 4. Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The absolute pressure sensor is built into ECM. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the microcomputer. Page 189 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3281 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5645 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5573 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2481 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 423 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4784 Page 3728 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4289 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 477 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 275 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3053 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 973 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1102 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5457 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5015 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3382 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4555 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4610 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 699 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4039 Step 21 - 22 Page 3253 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5691 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 902 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5260 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation System Description Operation HO2S1 HEATER System Description Operation HO2S2 HEATER HO2S1 Page 5695 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2582 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 2895 Page 1100 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5635 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Replacement Procedures Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Replacement Procedures Changing Brake Fluid CAUTION: ^ Refill with new brake fluid "DOT 3". ^ Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank. ^ Never reuse drained brake fluid. ^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Clean inside of reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to each air bleeder valve. 3. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 4. Refill until brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill brake fluid. Refer to Brake Bleeding; Service and Repair. Page 3042 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4314 Step 5 - 8 Page 3996 Step 31 Page 1060 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2189 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4179 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4709 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 778 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4424 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5602 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3084 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4185 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2477 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 136 Page 809 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4887 Description Part 1 Page 1620 Page 5572 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4157 Front Bumper LH Side / Intake Air Temperature Sensor Harness Connector Page 797 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 430 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5076 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3788 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap oil level gauge etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. 4. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. 7. Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. Page 3423 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Thermostat Page 998 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5100 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4198 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 855 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3657 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4291 Cranking Signal: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5195 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4633 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4833 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 569 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4932 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 735 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5147 Part 1 Page 2194 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 620 EC-PHASE-01 Connector Views Page 2100 1. Remove both front brake caliper assemblies. ^ Refer the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section BR for brake caliper assembly removal. 2. Check axial end play. ^ Specification: 0 mm (0 in.) ^ Refer to the Service Manual (ESM), section AX, for axial end play inspection and adjustment. 3. Inspect the rotors to confirm they are serviceable (they can be reused/resurfacing is possible). ^ Refer to the ESM, section BR, for rotor inspection ^ Minimum Thickness: 26.0 mm (1.024 in.) IMPORTANT: If new rotors are required, "index" them to the hub (see "Rotor Indexing"). Turn the front rotors Page 4083 ^ It is not necessary to remove any coolant hoses or drain the coolant during ignition coil removal. 6. Replace the resistor assembly in all ignition coil tubes as follows: A. Pull the rubber boot away from the ignition coil. Then, twist and pull the ignition coil tube from the ignition coil to separate them (see Figure 7). B. Remove the old resistor assembly parts from the ignition coil tube and discard. Insert the new resistor assembly into the ignition coil tube in the order shown in Figure 8 shown. C. Assemble the ignition coil tube to the ignition coil. ^ Rotate the tube while pressing onto the coil. ^ A "pop" sound will be heard when the rubber boot is seated correctly to the ignition coil. Locations Fusible Link: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5362 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2516 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 733 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5013 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4241 Description Part 1 Page 5180 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5826 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3095 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1426 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Specifications TIMING CHAIN Page 1718 Step 3 - 6 Page 2480 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 Page 2083 Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires Classification: WT06-002 Reference: NTB06-076 Date: November 7, 2006 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels SERVICE INFORMATION The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during wheel and tire service. Tire Changing: ^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside (internal jaws). ^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel. ^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or have rubber/plastic protective covers. Wheel Balancing: Page 1196 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 759 Type Of Standardized Relays Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85 V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 V Page 2820 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 986 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3588 Part 1 Part 2 Available Valve Shims Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve shim Thickness Identification mark 2.32 mm 232 2.33 mm 233 2.34 mm 234 2.35 mm 235 2.36 mm 236 2.37 mm 237 2.38 mm 238 2.39 mm 239 2.40 mm 240 2.41 mm 241 2.42 mm 242 2.43 mm 243 2.44 mm 244 2.45 mm 245 2.46 mm 246 2.47 mm 247 2.48 mm 248 2.49 mm 249 2.50 mm 250 2.51 mm 251 2.52 mm 252 2.53 mm 253 2.54 mm 254 2.55 mm 255 2.56 mm 256 2.57 mm 257 2.58 mm 258 2.59 mm 259 Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1724 Step 23 - 24 Page 2525 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4161 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3269 EC-FLS2-01 Page 5077 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations ECM / ECM Harness Connector Overall View Component View D Page 5226 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2416 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 884 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4749 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4951 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Specifications Valve Guide: Specifications Valve guide Outer diameter Standard 10.023 - 10.034 mm Service 10.223 - 10.234 mm Inner diameter (Finished size) 6.000 - 6.018 mm Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter Standard 9.975 - 9.996 mm Service 10.175 - 10.196 mm Interference fit of valve guide 0.027 - 0.059 mm Stem to guide clearance Intake Standard 0.020 - 0.053 mm Max. tolerance 0.08 mm Exhaust Standard 0.040 - 0.073 mm Max. tolerance 0.1 mm Valve deflection limit Intake 0.24 mm Exhaust 0.28 mm Projection length "L" 12.6 - 12.8 mm Page 4557 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2053 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Electrical Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8* V *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 1259 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 683 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2470 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4831 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1806 ^ Ensure there are no gaps and bulges between the coil body and the rubber boot (see Figure 9). 7. Install the repaired ignition coils (with the new resistor assembly) to the engine. CAUTION: When re-installing the ignition coils, make sure that the coils are correctly connected to the engine harness. 8. Re-install all other parts removed in reverse order. NOTE: Install a new throttle chamber gasket when re-installing parts (see PARTS INFORMATION section for further information). 9. Check to ensure the incident has been resolved by repeating steps 1 and 2. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 5713 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3643 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2657 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses, wires, harnesses, connectors and so on. 3. Remove intake manifold collectors. 4. Remove ignition coils and spark plugs. 5. Remove RH and LH rocker covers. 6. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. ^ Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. ^ Check that valve lifters on No. 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No. 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 1 of 2 Page 3726 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 143 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 678 Type Of Standardized Relays Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 2924 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5022 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3283 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1567 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4449 Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5780 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2636 A. Remove the engine decorative cover (see Figure 1) B. Remove four 10 mm head screws (two rear, two front) which hold the harness to the intake collector on the passenger side (see Figure 2). C. Remove the intake air duct (see Figure 3). Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 263 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4177 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3157 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5815 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2199 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1444 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 1440 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5741 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5724 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1078 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1302 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4738 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Page 2204 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 806 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1914 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Checking Part Time Checking Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid Check for fluid leakage and fluid level. A/T fluid is used for the transfer in the factory. Never start engine while checking fluid level. Filler plug: Tightening Torque: 25 - 34 N-m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18-25 ft-lb) Page 1706 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. 4. Measure distance "A" (rear side). 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180 degrees (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance "B" (front side). Total toe-in. 7. Adjust toe-in by varying the length of steering tie-rods. a. Loosen lock nuts. b. Adjust toe-in by screwing tie-rods in and out. Make sure both tie-rods are the same length. Standard length "L". c. Tighten lock nuts to specified torque. Lock nut tightening torque. Front Wheel Turning Angle Turning angle is set by stroke length of steering gear rack and cannot be adjusted. Page 4677 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 4641 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5063 Part 1 Page 3155 Description Part 1 Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust manifold bolts 28 - 32 Nm EXHAUST MANIFOLD TORQUE SEQUENCE / RIGHT BANK Page 3177 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4311 EC-S/SIG-01 Page 3332 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3907 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4231 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Navigation System - Multiple Malfunctions Technical Service Bulletin # 01-058 Date: 010831 Navigation System - Multiple Malfunctions Classification: EL01-016 Reference: NTB01-058 Date: August 31, 2001 NAVIGATION SYSTEM DISPLAY FREEZE, UN-INITIATED RE-ROUTING, AND NO VOICE GUIDANCE SYMPTOMS APPLIED VEHICLE: 2001 Pathfinder (R50) 2002 Pathfinder (R50), with X5.1 mapping CDs ONLY 2002 Maxima (A33), with X5.1 mapping CDs ONLY APPLIED VIN: 2002 Pathfinder before: JN8DR09X*2W651209 JN8DR09Y*2W703911 2002 Maxima before: JN1DA31A82T000792 (w/side air bags)* JN1DA31D52T408662 (w/o side air bags)* JN1DA31A92T304455 (w/side air bags)* JN1DA31D22T201596 (w/o side air bags)** All 2001 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED DATE: 2002 Pathfinder before: August 21, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits any of the symptoms listed below: ^ Display (screen) Freezes: The display freezes and the system stops functioning (including the A/C controls) when the vehicle is driven through a certain point/location. ^ Un-initiated Re-routing: After programming a route, the system will (during that route) re-route (re-calculate) to the pre-programmed destination point. ^ No Voice Guidance: After programming a route, the system will (during that route) stop providing voice guidance to the destination point. An upgraded navigation operating system (0/S) software CD is now available and can be installed to resolve the incidents, should they occur. All vehicles prior to the applied VINs that are currently in the dealer's inventory should be updated with the new 0/S software CD. This bulletin contains: ^ Information about the navigation 0/S software upgrade CD. ^ Installation procedure of the navigation 0/S software upgrade CD. NOTE: The above symptoms apply to "X5.1" (mapping) CDS ONLY. Service Procedure Summary ^ Determine which navigation operating system (0/S) software version the vehicle is equipped with ^ Apply the new navigation operating system (0/S) software CD (if needed) Install the new "X5.1" mapping CD Background: Page 2883 CAUTION: Wear suitable protective gloves (latex/nitril) and a face shield/goggles when handling the Exhaust Sealant. You may get a rash if it gets on your skin. Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shown for more information. Page 1699 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 3529 EC-TPS-01 Page 5634 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5776 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4935 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2761 2. Clean contact portion of tank. 3. Install sealing rubber. Push it in with fingers. Be careful not to twist sealing rubber. 1 of 2 2 of 2 4. Caulk tank in specified sequence with Tool. Page 4616 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 1098 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4787 Page 1775 Step 32 - 33 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 1346 Part 1 Specifications Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) IACV-AAC Valve Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] Approximately 20 - 24 Ohm Page 4468 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 1058 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3635 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4127 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5638 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4368 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3070 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Pulley / Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Testing and Inspection Combination Switch - Check Page 2974 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1480 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4529 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 643 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 72 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85 V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 V Page 4383 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1313 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3044 Part 1 Part 2 Page 894 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4713 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1956 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type API Grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II API Grade SJ, Energy Conserving ILSAC Grade GF-I & GF-II Page 3973 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 764 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2856 10. Remove the 3 water pump fixing bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley 20° backwards. 11. Put M8 bolts to two water pump fixing bolt holes. 12. Tighten M8 bolts by turning half turn alternately until they reach timing chain rear case. ^ In order to prevent damages to water pump or timing chain rear case, do not tighten one bolt continuously. Always turn each bolt half turn each time. 13. Lift up water pump and remove it. ^ When lifting up water pump, do not allow water pump gear to hit timing chain. INSPECTION 1. Check for badly rusted or corroded body assembly. Page 1201 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 946 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4222 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Checking Differential Gear Oil Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection Checking Differential Gear Oil Checking Differential Gear Oil Check for oil leakage and oil level. Filler plug: Front Tightening Torque: 39 - 59 N-m (4 - 6 kg-m, 29 - 43 ft-lb) Rear Tightening Torque: 59 - 118 N-m (6 - 12 kg-m, 43 - 87 ft-lb) Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 820 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 717 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2326 Part-time 4WD - 2WD M/T Page 3581 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 796 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 79 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Component Description Automatic Amplifier (Auto Amp.) The auto amplifier has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The auto amplifier is unitized with control mechanisms. Signals from various switches and Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) are directly entered into auto amplifier. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into auto amplifier to provide quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system. Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) Page 1722 Step 19 - 20 Page 5021 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5225 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Cooling System - Leaks/Overheating Radiator Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Leaks/Overheating Classification: EM04-002 Reference: NTB04-018 Date: February 06, 2004 RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION DURING COOLANT SYSTEM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1999 and Later Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM: An applied vehicle has any of the following symptoms: ^ Leaking radiator ^ Overheating cooling system OR If you removed the radiator cap for any other reason. ACTION: ^ Look for a "swollen" (enlarged) radiator cap gasket. See Figure 1a and 1b. ^ An enlarged radiator cap gasket can cause the cap to not vent properly. This can result in coolant loss and overheating. ^ See the Service Procedure for more details. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3479 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3050 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1507 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1033 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1390 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 409 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3386 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4497 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3510 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 149 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 2487 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5565 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3136 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2593 Step 19 - 20 Page 4008 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 1398 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4652 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3078 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4909 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 956 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 382 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 4975 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 577 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5275 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2884 a. Look at the crack(s) and confirm it is within the Outer Ribs of the Front Tube (see Figure 4). ^ If the crack(s) is within the Outer Ribs, go to the next step. ^ If the crack(s) is NOT within the Outer Ribs, this bulletin does not apply. b. Thoroughly clean the cracked side seams to remove all dust, dirt, and debris. c. Completely fill the provided (syringe) Applicator with 6ml of Exhaust Sealant. ^ This amount (6ml) of Sealant will be used for one Exhaust Patch. d. Apply 6ml of Sealant evenly between the two bumps ONLY of each Exhaust Patch (see Figure 5). e. Install the Exhaust Patches to both Front Tube Side Seams, making sure: Page 1034 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 2478 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4735 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5279 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1185 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3395 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3460 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 652 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3137 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4258 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4803 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 1277 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5186 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2678 Refer to the "Essential Tool Shipment" flyer shown for additional information. This special tool is "Essential" and was automatically sent to all Nissan dealers. Additional tools can be ordered from Tech-Mate (1-800-662-2001) for $196.43 each. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool for complete refill procedure. Key points to ensure the cooling system is purged of air bubbles are as follows; Always start with an Empty Radiator For step 2 of the Operating Instructions: ^ To hold the coolant mixture supply, use a clean bucket or other suitable container that is larger than the cooling system's total capacity. ^ The amount of coolant mixture in the refill supply must be more than needed to fill the system completely. Page 5099 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3035 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3058 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5783 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1442 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5074 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3780 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3138 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5232 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Thermostat Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove undercover. 2. Remove suspension member stay. 3. Drain coolant from radiator. 4. Remove drive belts. 5. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 6. Disconnect lower radiator hose. 7. Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly. ^ Do not disassemble water inlet and thermostat. Replace them as a unit, if necessary. 8. Install thermostat with jiggle valve facing upward. ^ After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check for leaks. ^ Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb coolant. 9. Reinstall any removed parts in reverse order of removal. Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5808 Part 1 Part 2 Page 650 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1478 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 850 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4294 Part 1 Page 4834 Part 1 Page 3702 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1197 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5162 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3428 Part 1 Page 3606 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3571 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position (PNP) switch is "ON". ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the "ON" signal) exists. For All models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. Page 1389 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3114 Description Part 1 Page 1646 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 2136 - Remove grease seal and bearing outer races with suitable brass bar. INSPECTION Thoroughly clean wheel bearings and wheel hub. Wheel Bearing Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, crack, pitting and wear. Wheel Hub Check wheel hub for crack by using a magnetic exploration or dyeing test. ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearing outer race with Tool until it seats in hub. 2. Pack multi-purpose grease into wheel hub. -4WD3. Apply multi-purpose grease to each bearing cone. 4. Pack grease seal lip with multi-purpose grease, then install it into wheel hub with suitable drift. Page 4711 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5336 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 175 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 506 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 1245 EC-MAFS-01 Connector Views Page 3882 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 147 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 974 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3221 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4588 Description Part 1 Page 5579 EC-TPS-01 Connector Views Page 5096 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3127 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2891 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Service Procedure CAUTION: Be careful when performing the following service procedures as the exhaust system can be HOT. NOTE: You do NOT need to remove the Front Tubes from the vehicle to perform the inspection or to install the Repair Kit. 1. Inspect both Front Tubes for cracking at both welded side seams. a. If there is cracking, apply the repair in this bulletin to BOTH Front Tubes. IMPORTANT: Read step "b" below before you apply the repair. Page 990 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5768 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4193 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 279 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1110 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4578 EC-FLS2-01 Page 893 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4538 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 5290 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 671 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5332 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3075 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4838 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2218 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVC-R-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5252 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-O2H1B1-01 Page 5784 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. - If the MIL does not light up refer to "WARNING LAMPS". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 4936 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2488 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Locations Component View A Page 1042 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5188 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 148 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4166 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2331 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Check WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and oil may be hot. ^ Oil pressure check should be done in "Neutral position" (M/T) or "Parking position" (A/T). 1. Check oil level. A/T models M/T models 2. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Remove oil pressure switch using a deep socket. (Commercial service tool) 4. Install pressure gauge. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks. 7. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows. a. Remove the old sealant adhering to switch and engine. b. Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent to the thread and tighten. 13 - 17 Nm (1.25 - 1.75 kg-m, 9 - 12 ft. lbs.) Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 1460 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4714 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2708 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1225 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5511 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 610 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3990 Step 14 - 18 Testing and Inspection Recirculation Switch Page 2730 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 908 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5097 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1017 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Locations Horn Relay Page 1748 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 810 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5277 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4162 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2987 Part 6 Page 2877 b. If either Front Tube looks like the one shown in Figure 3 (with a silver colored heat shield): ^ It is the new-style Front Tube. ^ Do NOT apply the repair kit on this type of Front Tube. NOTE: The vehicle you're working on may have both the new and the old Front Tubes. The Repair Kit should be used on the old-style Front Tube ONLY. 2. Repair the Front Tube(s) by installing Front Tube Repair Kit # 20711-5W90A as follows. ^ Remember NOT to repair a new-style Front Tube with the silver colored heat shield. NOTE: Perform this repair with the Front Tubes in the vehicle. Do NOT remove the Front Tubes. Page 857 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4047 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 257 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3628 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 449 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION Ambient Sensor After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor harness side, using the table above. If NG, replace ambient sensor. Page 5464 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 359 Type Of Standardized Relays Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF". WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 3568 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4520 Part 1 Page 4303 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3587 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 2790 Description Part 1 Page 965 Step 7 - 8 Page 5472 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Secondary Suppression Resistor: Customer Interest Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Classification: EL02-007 Reference: NTB02-040 Date: April 12, 2002 2002 PATHFINDER STATIC RADIO NOISE CAUSED BY IGNITION COILS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before: JN8DR09X*2W655078 JN8DR09Y*2W713864 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: October 22, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If the radio of an Applied Vehicle exhibits the following symptom: ^ A steady, rhythmic static noise heard from the speakers that "follows" engine speed on certain FM radio stations, The cause may be the ignition coil resistors. A new resistor assembly (located inside the ignition coil tube) is available to repair the described symptom, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 2. Turn radio on and search for several FM stations until a steady "ticking" or "popping" noise is heard through the speakers. Notes: ^ Weaker radio stations may make the static noise easier to detect, if it exists. ^ Increasing the treble and decreasing the bass settings may also make the "ticking" noise easier to detect, if it exists. 3. If the incident is duplicated, accelerate the engine and note if the frequency of the "ticking" or "popping" noise increases with engine speed. 4. If the noise does not "follow" the engine speed, the incident is not caused by the ignition coils. Consult the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) to diagnose and repair the incident. 5. If the noise "follows" the engine speed, remove all ignition coils from the engine using the following procedure: Page 851 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................. ...................................................... 8.5L (9.0 Qt US) Page 1511 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2511 Part 1 Page 696 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1671 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 843 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1901 Coolant: Service and Repair Refilling Engine Coolant 1. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug. 2. Close and tighten cylinder block drain plugs securely if removed. - Apply sealant to the thread of cylinder block drain plugs. Tightening Torque: 8 -11 N.m (0.8 -1.2 kg-m, 70-104 in-lb) Front side Tightening Torque: 18 - 21 N.m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 -15 ft-lb) Right side Use Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent. 3. Fill radiator slowly with coolant. If air relief plug was removed, fill until coolant spills from the air relief plug, then install air relief plug. 4. Fill reservoir tank if removed with coolant up to the MAX level and install radiator cap. Use Genuine Nissan antifreeze coolant or equivalent mixed with demineralized water/distilled water. For coolant mixture ratio, refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Coolant capacity (Without reservoir tank): 8.6 l (9-1/8 US qt, 7-5/8 Imp qt) Reservoir tank capacity (for MAX level): 0.6 l (5/8 US qt, 1/2 Imp qt) Pour coolant through coolant filler neck slowly to allow air in system to escape. 5. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature with radiator cap installed. 6. Run engine at 2,500 rpm for 10 seconds and return to idle speed. - Repeat 2 or 3 times. Watch coolant temperature gauge so as not to overheat the engine. 7. Stop engine and cool it down. - Cool down using a fan to reduce the time. 8. Refill reservoir tank to Max line with coolant. 9. Repeat steps 5 through step 8 two or more times until coolant level no longer drops. 10. Check cooling system for leaks with engine running. 11. Warm up engine, and check for sound of coolant flow while running engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm with heater temperature control set at several positions between COOL and HOT. Sound may be noticeable at heater water cock. Page 1919 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing All-Mode Changing All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid When changing all-mode 4WD transfer fluid completely, A/T fluid may be used. Fluid grade: Nissan Matic "D" (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants", "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Fluid capacity: 3.0 l (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 Imp qt) Drain plug: 10 - 20 N-m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 174 in-lb) Page 1396 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 493 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4164 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5177 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 505 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Make sure that higher A/C refrigerant-pressure results in higher refrigerant-pressure sensor output voltage. Check voltage between ECM harness terminal No. 81 and body ground. Refer to "Diagnostic Procedure". Page 1085 EC-PNP/SW-01 Page 1292 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2599 Step 32 - 33 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 4305 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1449 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-POS-01 Page 3685 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1716 Overall Inspection Sequence Specifications Fuel Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3164 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2298 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1630 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Page 1093 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3200 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 448 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The ambient sensor is located on the hood lock stay. It detects ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is then input into the auto amplifier. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS The automatic amplifier includes a "processing circuit" for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the auto amp. function. It only allows the auto amp. to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33 °C (0.6 °F) per 100 seconds. As an example, consider stopping for a cup of coffee after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor. Page 5660 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 214 Part 7 Page 621 EC-PHASE-01 Page 5036 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5065 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3985 Overall Inspection Sequence Page 1157 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1386 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5395 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 552 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Brakes - Front Brake Vibration/Pulsation/Judder Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Vibration/Pulsation/Judder Classification: BR03-002 Reference: NTB03-091 Date: October 8, 2003 2001-2003 PATHFINDER; BRAKE JUDDER FROM FRONT BRAKES APPLIED VEHICLE: 2001 - 2003 Pathfinder (R50) IF YOU CONFIRM: While braking, a steering wheel shake, body vibration, or brake pedal pulsation (also known as "brake judder"), especially during high speed braking. ACTIONS: ^ Check front wheel bearing axial end play. ^ "Turn" the front brake rotors using an On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Install the new front brake pads and hardware kit (see Parts Information). ^ Burnish the brake pads. NOTE: Brake judder repair, as outlined in this bulletin, is covered by the 3 year, 36,000 mile warranty for Applied Vehicles. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check front wheel axial play Page 2928 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 3466 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2965 Part 1 Page 3120 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4433 EC-LOAD-01 Page 1649 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 335 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor Always replace G sensor if bumped or dropped. Otherwise, performance characteristics of G sensor will be changed, which in turn changes ABS control performance characteristics. Page 825 EC-IATS-01 Page 5424 EC-PNP/SW-01 Page 128 Page 4860 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 362 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5782 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5105 Part 1 Page 1233 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4991 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4036 Step 11 - 13 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 1512 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 842 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 284 EC-AT/C-01 Page 2935 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 1579 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3888 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5701 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4234 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No. signal. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No. signal. Page 5293 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2779 ^ Install a new radiator cap. Page 1689 Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. Page 5383 EC-TPS-01 Page 1769 Step 19 - 20 Page 491 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 2696 Fan Clutch: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ^ Do not release the drive belt tension by removing the fan/water pump pulley. ^ Fan coupling cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. If front mark F is present, install fan so that side marked F faces the front. ^ Install the drive belt only after the fan and fan coupling to water pump flange bolts/nuts have been properly torqued. Proper alignment of these components is essential. ^ Improper alignment will cause them to wobble and may eventually cause the fan to separate from the water pump causing extensive damage. Page 3660 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3830 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4754 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5030 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4321 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5821 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Description and Operation Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation G SENSOR (4WD MODELS ONLY) The G sensor senses deceleration during braking to determine whether the vehicle is being driven on a high coefficient of friction road (asphalt road, etc.) or a low coefficient of friction road (snow-covered road, etc.). It then sends a signal to the ABS control unit. The reed switch turns on when it is affected by a magnetic field. During sudden deceleration (braking on a high coefficient of friction road), the weight moves and the magnet in the weight moves away from the reed switch. The magnetic field then diminishes and the reed switch turns off. Page 1568 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3592 Part 1 Page 2315 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 3512 Part 1 Page 3665 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5663 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Page 4513 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3197 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3490 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling system (With reservior) 9.2 L Page 3340 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Power Steering Pressure Switch: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 4403 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2938 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 2458 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 86 If OK, check auto amp. ground circuit, see below. - If NG, check 7.5 A fuses (Nos. 11 and 24, located in the fuse block) and 15 A fuses (Nos. 1 and 2, located in the fuse block). - If fuses are OK, check for open circuit in wiring harness. Repair or replace as necessary. - If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check wiring harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. NOTE: If OK, replace auto amp. If NG, repair or replace harness. Page 2196 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4454 Page 4043 Step 31 Page 4804 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 4826 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5744 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The vehicle speed sensor signal is sent from ABS actuator and electric unit to combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 5282 Part 1 Page 794 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2762 ^ Use pliers in the locations where Tool cannot be used. 5. Make sure that the rim is completely crimped down. Standard height "H": 8.0 - 8.4 mm (0.315 - 0.331 inch) 6. Confirm that there is no leakage. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2505 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21-26 Nm, 16-19 ft lb Page 1211 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5477 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5106 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4763 EC-PST/SW-01 Connector Views Page 274 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3705 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2843 Thermostat: Service and Repair Water Control Valve - Secondary Thermostat REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Remove undercover. 3. Remove suspension member stay. 4. Drain coolant from radiator. 5. Remove engine cover. 6. Remove air duct with air cleaner assembly. 7. Disconnect wires, hoses, harness and so on. 8. Remove upper intake manifold corrector. 9. Remove intake manifold corrector support bolts. 10. Remove lower intake manifold corrector. 11. Disconnect injector harness connectors. 12. Remove injector tube. 13. Remove intake manifold. 14. Remove water outlet housing and water control valve. 15. Install water control valve and water outlet housing. a. Install gum ring to thermostat. b. Point the arrow on the upper surface of the valve to the front of the engine, and also be sure to install the protrusions and the valve stopper so that they are aligned in a straight line. 16. Reinstall any removed parts in reverse order of removal. ^ When installing intake manifold, injector tube and intake manifold collectors, refer to Engine; Service and Repair; Tightening Procedures. ^ After installation, run engine for a few minutes, and check for leaks. ^ Be careful not to spill coolant over engine compartment. Use a rag to absorb coolant. Page 2955 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1079 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3378 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4849 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 872 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3826 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3088 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 421 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2211 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1372 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Pulley / Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Page 2649 11. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open. 12. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 13. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 14. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. ^ If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. ^ If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace them. ^ If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 15. Install parts in reverse order of removal. 16. Perform "Self-diagnosis Procedure" if any DTC appears. Refer to Powertrain Management; Computers and Control Systems. Page 3686 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5054 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3975 EC-KS-01 Page 3538 Description Part 1 Page 5727 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5041 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-POS-01 Page 4953 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1542 Step 4 - 6 Page 4392 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2759 Radiator: Service and Repair Aluminum Type Radiator Overhaul Radiator (Aluminum type) PREPARATION 1. Attach the spacer to the tip of the radiator plate pliers A. Spacer specification: 1.5 mm (0.059 inch) thick x 18 mm (0.71 inch) wide x 8.5 mm (0.335 inch) long. 2. Make sure that when radiator plate pliers A are closed dimension H" is approx. 7.6 mm (0.299 inch). 3. Adjust dimension H" with the spacer, if necessary. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove tank with Tool. Testing and Inspection A/C Switch Page 4389 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5250 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views EC-O2H1B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S1B1-01 Connector Views Page 1064 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4302 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3159 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5470 Description Part 1 Page 3360 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater Resistance [at 25 deg C (77 deg F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Resistance [at 25 °C (77 °F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4448 Page 1144 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3886 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4836 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 818 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 208 Part 1 Page 2944 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Locations Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Locations Overall View Component View F Page 563 Part 1 Page 1543 Step 7 - 8 Page 5278 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4183 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4970 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2412 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3515 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1057 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5392 Description Part 1 Page 4352 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3638 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5527 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1188 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Removal and Installation Page 1354 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 2662 11. Install new shim using a suitable tool. ^ Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 12. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 13. Remove Tool (B). 14. Remove Tool (A). 15. Recheck valve clearance. Valve clearance Available Valve Shims Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve shim Thickness Identification mark 2.32 mm 232 2.33 mm 233 2.34 mm 234 2.35 mm 235 2.36 mm 236 2.37 mm 237 2.38 mm 238 2.39 mm 239 2.40 mm 240 2.41 mm 241 2.42 mm 242 2.43 mm 243 2.44 mm 244 2.45 mm 245 2.46 mm 246 2.47 mm 247 2.48 mm 248 2.49 mm 249 2.50 mm 250 2.51 mm 251 2.52 mm 252 2.53 mm 253 2.54 mm 254 2.55 mm 255 2.56 mm 256 2.57 mm 257 2.58 mm 258 2.59 mm 259 Page 4215 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3300 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3644 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1301 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3727 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 987 Part 1 Page 1538 EC-PST/SW-01 Page 2807 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 199 Part 2 Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] 470 - 570 Ohm Page 281 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5062 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1117 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 375 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4523 Part 4 Page 4732 Description Part 1 Page 142 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 654 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1640 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 4473 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 188 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4188 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1661 ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. Page 840 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3770 EC-FTTS-01 Page 4353 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5338 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2679 ^ This will help avoid pulling in air at the end of the refilling procedure. NOTE: ^ See the appropriate Service Manual for cooling system refill capacity. ^ Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. For step 3 of the Operating Instructions: ^ Make sure to Purge all air from the Refill Tube (intake hose) before beginning the refill process. NOTE: The Venturi will NOT be harmed if some coolant goes through it during the air purge process. ^ Place the container of coolant mixture above the level of the radiator during the refill process. Page 4131 Part 1 Part 2 Page 694 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4133 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5462 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Page 2355 Left side 23. Remove front suspension member bolts. 24. Lower the transmission jack carefully to secure clearance between the oil pan and suspension member. 25. Remove A/T oil cooler tube. (A/T) 26. Remove water hose and tube. (A/T) 27. Remove the four engine-to-transmission bolts. 28. Remove aluminum oil pan bolts in numerical order. 29. Remove aluminum oil pan. a. Insert tool between aluminum oil pan and cylinder block. ^ Be careful not to damage aluminum mating surface. ^ Do not insert screwdriver, or oil pan flange will be deformed. b. Slide tool by tapping its side with a hammer. Page 1303 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 945 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4840 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4910 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1843 Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5102 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2602 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 5114 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2925 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 1438 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 155 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 609 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4410 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 823 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4595 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4419 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2319 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Checking Drive Belts 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear and oil. If necessary, replace. 2. Inspect drive belt deflection or tension at a point on the belt midway between pulleys. 3. Check belt tension using belt tension gauge (BT3373-F or equivalent). Belt Deflection And Tension Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. Page 5165 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 3203 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3481 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2930 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 1177 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1947 Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Fluid Part time 4WD Model .......................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.2L (2 3/8 Qt US) All Mode 4WD Model ........................................................................................................................... .................................................. 3.0L (3 1/8 Qt US) Page 5330 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4453 Page 675 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1582 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 783 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-FLS1-01 Page 5799 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1766 Step 7 - 10 Page 5435 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Page 3729 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 140 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 586 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4169 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 475 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5592 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4894 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 966 Consult-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode Page 5788 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3140 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips Classification: PI95-005A Reference: NTB95-120A Date: January 10, 2003 COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all paper copies of PI95-005 APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models SERVICE INFORMATION In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure. ^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual. ^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start. 1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor. 2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine. 3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal. NOTE: Do not race the engine while warming it up. 4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then repeat steps 1 through 3. Once an engine is started in cold weather condition: ^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off. ^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to restart. ^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy. Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is used. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models. ^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during warm-up. Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers. Disclaimer Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Secondary Suppression Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Classification: EL02-007 Reference: NTB02-040 Date: April 12, 2002 2002 PATHFINDER STATIC RADIO NOISE CAUSED BY IGNITION COILS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before: JN8DR09X*2W655078 JN8DR09Y*2W713864 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: October 22, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If the radio of an Applied Vehicle exhibits the following symptom: ^ A steady, rhythmic static noise heard from the speakers that "follows" engine speed on certain FM radio stations, The cause may be the ignition coil resistors. A new resistor assembly (located inside the ignition coil tube) is available to repair the described symptom, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 2. Turn radio on and search for several FM stations until a steady "ticking" or "popping" noise is heard through the speakers. Notes: ^ Weaker radio stations may make the static noise easier to detect, if it exists. ^ Increasing the treble and decreasing the bass settings may also make the "ticking" noise easier to detect, if it exists. 3. If the incident is duplicated, accelerate the engine and note if the frequency of the "ticking" or "popping" noise increases with engine speed. 4. If the noise does not "follow" the engine speed, the incident is not caused by the ignition coils. Consult the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) to diagnose and repair the incident. 5. If the noise "follows" the engine speed, remove all ignition coils from the engine using the following procedure: Page 3793 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4844 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 2661 8. Blow air into the hole to separate adjusting shim from valve lifter. 9. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. 10. Determine replacement adjusting shim size following formula. ^ Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. ^ Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake: N = R + [M - 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch)] Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.33 mm (0.0130 inch)] Shims are available in 64 sizes from 2.32 mm (0.0913 inch) to 2.95 mm (0.1161 inch), in steps of 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch). ^ Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. Page 887 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4325 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 605 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5737 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 918 EC-O2S1B2-01 Page 3463 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1198 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3263 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2732 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 403 Description Part 1 Page 2415 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1112 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5049 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5772 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4246 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2167 If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft beforehand to prevent damage to the transmission. PART TIME 4WD MODELS NISSAN recommends that a dolly be used as illustrated when towing 4WD models. CAUTION: If towing with the front wheels on the ground or with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) is necessary: Move the transfer case shift lever into the 2H position. - When towing with the front wheels on the ground: On manual transmission models to move the shift lever to the N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or similar device. On automatic transmission models to move the selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to the ACC position. After moving the selector lever to the N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. - When towing manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground: Always release the parking brake and move the transmission shift lever to the N (neutral) position. Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Manual transmission models: - Speed: Below 95 km/h (59 MPH) - Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles) If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the front and rear propeller shafts beforehand to prevent damage to the transmission. Page 2953 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2388 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5723 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 886 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2187 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3927 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4135 Part 1 Page 5331 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Locations Engine Compartment Page 978 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5786 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5079 EC-LOAD-01 Connector Views Page 5033 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4719 EC-O2H2B1-01 Page 589 Description Part 1 Page 2897 Page 1435 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 775 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 353 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1065 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 930 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5251 EC-O2S1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B2-01 Connector Views Page 5231 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3051 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3299 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 961 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Component Description The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 3296 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 615 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1814 ^ It is not necessary to remove any coolant hoses or drain the coolant during ignition coil removal. 6. Replace the resistor assembly in all ignition coil tubes as follows: A. Pull the rubber boot away from the ignition coil. Then, twist and pull the ignition coil tube from the ignition coil to separate them (see Figure 7). B. Remove the old resistor assembly parts from the ignition coil tube and discard. Insert the new resistor assembly into the ignition coil tube in the order shown in Figure 8 shown. C. Assemble the ignition coil tube to the ignition coil. ^ Rotate the tube while pressing onto the coil. ^ A "pop" sound will be heard when the rubber boot is seated correctly to the ignition coil. Page 3915 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3462 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1266 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4697 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3719 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3123 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1395 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5609 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5172 Description Part 1 Page 5194 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3558 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] 470 - 570 Ohm Page 4120 Description Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. - If the MIL does not light up refer to "WARNING LAMPS". 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. Page 3507 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1391 Part 1 Page 2682 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant type Genuine Nissan anti-coolant or equivalent Page 5823 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4979 Part 1 Part 2 Page 948 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Page 1490 EC-KS-01 Page 3061 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5596 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1428 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5762 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1815 ^ Ensure there are no gaps and bulges between the coil body and the rubber boot (see Figure 9). 7. Install the repaired ignition coils (with the new resistor assembly) to the engine. CAUTION: When re-installing the ignition coils, make sure that the coils are correctly connected to the engine harness. 8. Re-install all other parts removed in reverse order. NOTE: Install a new throttle chamber gasket when re-installing parts (see PARTS INFORMATION section for further information). 9. Check to ensure the incident has been resolved by repeating steps 1 and 2. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 3178 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 949 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5371 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5775 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1316 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4213 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4471 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 3424 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2806 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1845 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 3604 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5396 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5222 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4820 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4852 Part 2 Page 3760 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2991 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 5809 Canister Vent Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4381 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3485 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2819 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5078 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3238 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5490 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2168 ALL-MODE 4WD MODELS NISSAN recommends that a dolly or a flat bed truck be used as illustrated when towing all-mode 4WD models. VEHICLE RECOVERY - Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. - Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook. - The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle. - Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Page 3670 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3911 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4837 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5818 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5117 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1133 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4600 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5495 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1591 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 342 ^ Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown. Page 5283 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5460 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1763 Overall Inspection Sequence Page 5288 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 656 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3683 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 988 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5070 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1062 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4545 Description Part 1 Page 2882 Page 3716 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1016 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1186 Part 1 Page 1466 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5563 Part 1 Page 3441 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4297 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5537 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4106 8. Blow air into the hole to separate adjusting shim from valve lifter. 9. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. 10. Determine replacement adjusting shim size following formula. ^ Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. ^ Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake: N = R + [M - 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch)] Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.33 mm (0.0130 inch)] Shims are available in 64 sizes from 2.32 mm (0.0913 inch) to 2.95 mm (0.1161 inch), in steps of 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch). ^ Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. Page 5372 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4540 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 1030 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3189 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the gear teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). CKP SENSOR Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan (upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead Center) signal (120° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal (120° signal). Page 4676 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 3766 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1883 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Bleeding Procedures Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: ^ Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ^ If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air from master cylinder first. ^ Fill reservoir with new brake fluid "DOT 3". Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ^ Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ^ Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connectors or battery ground cable. ^ Bleed air in the following order. 1. LSV air bleeder (4WD) 2. Left rear brake 3. Right rear brake 4. Left front brake 5. Right front brake 1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 3. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 4. Close air bleeder valve. 5. Release brake pedal slowly. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of air bleeder valve. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve. 7 - 9 Nm (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 inch lbs.) Page 5755 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4987 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5313 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1970 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................. HFC-134a (R-134a) For further details see the "Air conditioner specification label" under the vehicle's hood. Page 807 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1619 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 2284 10. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 11. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 12. Set No. 5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 13. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 14. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. If they are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. ^ Intake manifold collectors ^ RH and LH rocker covers ^ All spark plugs ^ All ignition coils Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Power Steering Pressure Switch: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 3801 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3988 Step 7 - 10 Page 3554 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component Locations Overall view Component View F Page 798 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3473 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5686 Part 1 Electrical Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8* V *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 4680 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 RH Harness Connector / Engine Front Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Left Bank) / Transmission / Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Right Bank) Page 3684 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Description and Operation Oil Filter: Description and Operation OIL FILTER The oil filter is a small, full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. ^ Use Tool specified for changing oil filter. Page 576 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4009 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 483 Part 1 Page 428 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4088 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Changing Spark Plugs 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove throttle wires. 3. Remove air duct with air cleaner assembly. 4. Disconnect harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coil sides. 5. Remove throttle body. (Only when removing the No. 4 cylinder spark plug) 6. Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors. 7. Loosen ignition coil fixing bolts and pull out coil from intake manifold connector. Ignition coil: Tightening Torque: 8.5 - 10.7 N.m (0.86 - 1.1 kg-m, 75 - 95 in-lb) 8. Check type and gap of new spark plug. Spark plug type (Platinum-tipped type): Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Spark plug: Tightening Torque: 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14-22 ft-lb) Page 2667 Water Pump: Specifications Water pump Pump assembly 8.5 - 10.7 Nm Pump cover 10 - 13 Nm Drain plug 7.8 - 11.8 Nm Chain tensioner cover 10 - 13 Nm Chain tensioner 7.0 - 9.3 Nm Page 2210 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1104 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2592 Step 14 - 18 Page 4300 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1139 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5683 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5421 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Locations Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 4651 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5320 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 550 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 769 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2688 12. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating steps 5 through 8 until coolant level no longer drops. - Clean excess coolant from engine. Page 4040 Step 23 - 24 Page 4835 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3823 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1082 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2627 A. Remove the engine decorative cover (see Figure 1) B. Remove four 10 mm head screws (two rear, two front) which hold the harness to the intake collector on the passenger side (see Figure 2). C. Remove the intake air duct (see Figure 3). Page 3642 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Testing and Inspection Power Steering Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection CHECKING LINES - Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. - Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid. Page 4180 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4037 Step 14 - 18 Page 1044 EC-TPS-01 Page 1592 EC-PNP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 4955 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4780 Page 3465 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2876 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Service Procedure CAUTION: Be careful when performing the following service procedures as the exhaust system can be HOT. NOTE: You do NOT need to remove the Front Tubes from the vehicle to perform the inspection or to install the Repair Kit. 1. Inspect both Front Tubes for cracking at both welded side seams. a. If there is cracking, apply the repair in this bulletin to BOTH Front Tubes. IMPORTANT: Read step "b" below before you apply the repair. Page 1516 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 367 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4631 Description Part 1 Page 56 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery cable. 2. Drain brake fluid. 3. Remove mounting bracket fixing bolts and nuts. 4. Disconnect connector, brake pipes and remove fixing nuts and actuator ground cable. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installation, refill brake fluid. Then bleed air. 1. Tighten actuator ground cable. Place ground cable at a notch of mounting bracket. 2. Connect brake pipes temporarily. 3. Tighten fixing bolts and nuts. 4. Tighten brake pipes. 5. Connect connector and battery cable. Page 2363 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Check WARNING: ^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and oil may be hot. ^ Oil pressure check should be done in "Neutral position" (M/T) or "Parking position" (A/T). 1. Check oil level. A/T models M/T models 2. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Remove oil pressure switch using a deep socket. (Commercial service tool) 4. Install pressure gauge. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for oil leaks. 7. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows. a. Remove the old sealant adhering to switch and engine. b. Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent to the thread and tighten. 13 - 17 Nm (1.25 - 1.75 kg-m, 9 - 12 ft. lbs.) Page 5239 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5480 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3059 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3315 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5549 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1835 10. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 11. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 12. Set No. 5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 13. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 14. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. If they are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. ^ Intake manifold collectors ^ RH and LH rocker covers ^ All spark plugs ^ All ignition coils Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Page 1355 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1473 Part 1 Page 2260 Taper (A - B) Less than 0.002 mm Runout [TIR] Limit Less than 0.10 mm Free end play Standard 0.10 - 0.25 mm Limit 0.30 mm Page 4107 11. Install new shim using a suitable tool. ^ Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 12. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 13. Remove Tool (B). 14. Remove Tool (A). 15. Recheck valve clearance. Valve clearance Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications At idle Vaccuum hose connected 235 Kpa (2.4 kg/sq.cm 34 psi Vacuum hose disconnected 294 Kpa (3.0 kg/sq.cm 43 psi Page 3333 Part 1 Page 4367 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4350 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4280 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 406 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3813 Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 2173 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Screw Jack Screw Jack WARNING: - Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. - Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. Page 4618 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1720 Step 11 - 13 Page 3294 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 87 Fan Control Amp. Page 2594 Step 21 - 22 Page 1465 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3966 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4819 Description Part 1 Page 3103 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5316 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch Page 658 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 103 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 4925 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Locations Component View A Page 836 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5151 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1404 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5828 EC-VENT/V-01 Connector Views Page 3792 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1450 EC-REF-01 Page 3842 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3751 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake manifold Step 1 5 - 10 Nm Step 2 26 - 31 Nm Throttle Body Step 1 8.8 - 10.8 Nm Step 2 18 - 21 Nm Page 3881 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 636 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Electric Load Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5698 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2655 2.92 mm 292 2.93 mm 293 2.94 mm 294 2.95 mm 295 Page 1673 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 5417 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3868 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5643 Part 1 Part 2 Page 877 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1037 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Components Locations Overall View Overall View Page 714 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4984 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3419 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5632 Description Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5113 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Auto Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Auto Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large gas leakage occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 Step 1 - 3 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the test group shown above. Page 4326 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2507 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5000 EC-ECTS-01 Page 5212 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 254 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4566 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Mechanical Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Mechanical Specifications TX10A Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ................................ 2.2L (2-3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt) ATX14A Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ......................... 3.0 L (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 Imp qt) Page 682 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 613 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3322 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4924 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Pulley / Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Page 4846 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 724 Part 1 Page 3967 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3950 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1283 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5286 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5248 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4370 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2519 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1270 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2498 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5590 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3767 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3125 Part 1 Part 2 Page 145 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Specifications Fuel Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 Page 4632 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1834 2 of 2 7. Check only those valves shown in the figure. ^ Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. ^ Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance for checking (Cold): Intake 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) 8. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 9. Set No. 3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 Page 4134 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4740 Type Of Standardized Relays Description and Operation Intake Sensor: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the auto amp. After disconnecting intake sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table above. If NG, replace intake sensor. Page 777 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2810 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4191 EC-IATS-01 Connector Views Page 3797 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3516 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1626 Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander Locations Thermal Transmitter Connector Page 2728 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4263 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 640 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5487 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3097 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 611 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 808 Part 1 Primary Thermostat Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Primary Thermostat INSPECTION 1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly. 2. Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift. 3. Then check if valve closes at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. Page 1304 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1908 Disclaimer Page 5692 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2999 Part 8 Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Power Steering Pressure Switch: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Exhaust System - Front Exhaust Tubes Leaking/Noisy Technical Service Bulletin # 04-092 Date: 040901 Exhaust System - Front Exhaust Tubes Leaking/Noisy Classification: FE04-002 Reference: NTB04-092 Date: September 1, 2004 REPAIR OF EXHAUST LEAK/NOISE AT FRONT TUBE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2002-03 Pathfinder (R50) IF YOU CONFIRM: The vehicle has an exhaust leak or noise coming from the Front Tube(s). NOTE: The Front Tubes may look like catalysts, but they are (by design) NOT catalysts. ACTION: ^ Inspect both Front Tubes for cracking at the welded side seams. ^ If needed, repair the Front Tube(s) by installing Front Tube Repair Kit # 20711-5W90A. PARTS INFORMATION Page 416 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1291 Description Part 1 Page 3524 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3438 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 368 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression presure Standard 1275 kPa Minimum 981 kPa Differential limit between cylinders 98 kPa Cylinder number See image Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5368 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2929 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 5204 EC-KS-01 Page 2442 15. Tighten bolts to the specified torque in order shown in the figure. - Leave the bolts unattended for 30 minutes or more after tightening. 16. Install intake valve timing control valve cover. a. Install O-rings at front timing chain case. b. Install seal ring at intake valve timing control valve covers. c. Apply liquid gasket to intake valve timing control valve covers. Use genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the intake valve timing control valve cover. - Tighten in numerical order as shown in the figure RH rocker cover Page 194 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4152 EC-MAFS-01 Page 489 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4807 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 4654 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 2081 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 4751 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1146 Part 1 Page 2923 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 591 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3550 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2402 Part 1 Page 3837 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5567 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4971 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 84 With Navigation System Part 2 With Navigation System Page 5539 EC-TP/SW-01 Connector Views Locations Key Switch Page 585 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Pulley / Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Page 3161 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5593 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2736 EC-ECTS-01 Page 2213 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4452 Page 2393 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2564 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 2231 Page 4533 Part 4 Page 3591 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2821 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 2042 Page 4948 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 928 Description Part 1 Page 3933 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-POS-01 Connector Views EC-REF-01 Connector Views Page 1350 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2112 ^ Do Not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact wrench. ^ Uneven or high torque applied to the lugs may "distort" the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. Burnish the brake pads 9. Burnish the brake pads as follow: A. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph). B. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph (50 kph). Adjust pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds. C. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without stopping. D. Repeat steps A, B and C 3 to 5 times to complete the burnishing process. Rotor Indexing When installing a new rotor, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of rotor runout is achieved. 1. Ensure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor to hub surface if it is rusty. NOTE: For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. 2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs. 3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub (see Figure 6). 4. Measure rotor runout with a dial indicator (see Figure 7). ^ If the runout is above 0.03 mm (0.001), continue with step 5. NOTE: Runout specification is new, and is slightly less than what is shown in the ESM. 5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug then reinstall the lug nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs. ^ Repeat step 4 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout. 6. After finding the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than 0.03 mm (0.001 in), the new rotors must be turned (resurfaced). See step 4 in the Service Procedure. Page 3379 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 2256 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main bearing cap bolts Step 1 32 - 38 Nm Step 2 90 - 95° Page 1125 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 1360 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3326 Type Of Standardized Relays Specifications Valve Seat: Specifications Valve seat Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D) Intake Standard 38.000 - 38.016 mm Service 38.500 - 38.516 mm Exhaust Standard 32.200 - 32.216 mm Service 32.700 - 32.716 mm Valve seat interference fit Intake 0.081 - 0.113 mm Exhaust 0.064 - 0.096 mm Valve seat outer diameter (d) Intake Standard 38.097 - 38.113 mm Service 38.597 - 38.613 mm Exhaust Standard 32.280 - 32.296 mm Service 32.780 - 32.796 mm Height (h) Intake Standard 5.9 - 6.0 mm Service 5.05 - 5.15 mm Exhaust Standard 5.9 - 6.0 mm Service 4.95 - 5.05 mm Depth (H) 5.9 - 6.1 mm Depth (L) Intake 41.07 - 41.67 mm Exhaust 41.00 - 41.60 mm Page 1441 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5224 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3563 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5684 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2726 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5035 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4685 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5648 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1364 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation P0121, P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch" which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. P0510 CTP SENSOR Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 647 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 716 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 770 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3600 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4593 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4823 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 984 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3248 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4708 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3063 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4758 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4643 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2571 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4687 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3739 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5459 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2435 - Loosen bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure. - In the cover, the shaft is engaged with the center hole of the intake cam sprocket. Remove it straight out until the engagement comes off. 28. Remove front timing chain case bolts. - Loosen bolts in numerical order as shown in the figure. 29. Remove front timing chain case. - Do not scratch sealing surfaces. 30. Remove internal chain guide. 31. Remove upper tension guide. 32. Remove timing chain tensioner and slack guide. Page 260 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4160 Description Part 1 Page 795 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5576 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4387 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3482 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3452 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 3231 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 1075 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4865 Part 5 Page 5291 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3738 Description Part 1 Page 4142 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1420 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3546 Type Of Standardized Relays Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 4343 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5485 Part 1 Page 1262 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5750 - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 of J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. - Do not overtorque the oxygen sensor. Doing so may cause damage to the oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 126 Page 1422 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 31 Navigation Operating System Software Upgrade Information ^ The Program CD-ROM (see Figure 1) containing the latest navigation operating system software upgrade was sent to all Nissan dealer Service Managers on: September 4, 2001. ^ This latest software upgrade (WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33] / WXC22031 [R50]) supercedes all previous upgrades. Please discard all previous software upgrade CDROMS. ^ The table (titled: "Navigation Program CD-ROM Upgrade Release Information") provides detailed information for all Program CD-ROM upgrade releases to date. Navigation Program CD-ROM Upgrade Release Information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Questions or Concerns If you have additional questions or concerns, call Nissan Consumer Affairs at 1-800-NISSAN-1 and press the prompt for the Nissan Navigation System Help Desk. Ordering Additional Materials Additional copies of the item listed below can be ordered from Dyment Distribution Services at 1-800-247-5321. ^ Quick Reference Guide CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4269 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 504 Step 3 - 8 Step 9 Page 5357 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4896 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1406 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2994 Part 3 Page 418 Part 1 Page 3892 EC-PHASE-01 Connector Views Page 1717 Step 1 - 2 Page 2529 EC-IVC-L-01 Page 2441 9. Install internal guide. 10. Install upper tension guide and slack guide. 11. Install timing chain tensioner, then remove the stopper pin. - When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. 12. Install O-rings on rear timing chain case. 13. Apply liquid gasket to front timing chain case. Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. 14. Install rear case pin into dowel pin hole on front timing chain case. Page 5271 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap oil level gauge etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. 4. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. 7. Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. Page 2990 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Page 5261 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the front tube. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 V to 0 V. HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2 after three way catalyst monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 3293 Part 1 Page 955 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 0.45 kg (0.99 lb) Page 544 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g.m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g.m/sec at 2,500 rpm* *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 3640 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3309 EC-IATS-01 Connector Views Page 3954 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1312 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1217 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2192 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5705 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position camshaft position engine speed and engine coolant temperature. Then the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the camshaft timing control valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Page 5767 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5704 EC-IVC-L-01 Page 2304 Valve Spring: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Head Assembly; Service and Repair. Page 3251 Part 1 Page 5561 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4716 EC-O2S1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B2-01 Connector Views Page 426 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 592 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3089 Part 1 Page 1562 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 982 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Locations Seatback Heating Unit Page 571 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4481 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 2671 2. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Apply engine oil and coolant to O-rings as shown in the figure. 2. Install water pump. ^ Do not allow cylinder block to nip O-rings when installing water pump. 3. Before installing, remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of front cover. Page 3289 Part 1 Part 2 Page 83 Auto Amp. Inspection Table Part 1 Auto Amp. Inspection Table Part 2 Without Navigation System With Navigation System Part 1 Page 1299 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 594 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4033 Step 1 - 2 Page 3946 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 935 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1105 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3437 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3105 EC-PHASE-01 Connector Views Page 1513 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3603 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4934 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4832 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3339 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3427 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3046 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4624 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 4512 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations Components Locations Overall View Component View A Page 1629 ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. Page 3970 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5028 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Diagram Information and Instructions Electric Load Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3943 Description Part 1 Page 3590 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2921 Attachment General Procedure Page 1155 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5365 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2508 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2927 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4993 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3318 Description Part 1 Page 2561 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 3172 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 900 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2989 Part 8 Page 761 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 150 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4379 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Locations EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Harness Connector / Rear Left Tire / Spare Tire Page 3858 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3264 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2186 Description Part 1 Page 3372 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 482 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 819 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4726 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the front tube. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 V to 0 V. HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2 after three way catalyst monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 1240 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 785 EC-FLS3-01 Page 835 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1846 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 3335 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4764 EC-PST/SW-01 Page 4551 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2461 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1535 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2669 Water Pump: Service and Repair REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. ^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. ^ After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. 1. Remove undercover. 2. Remove suspension member stay. 3. Drain coolant from radiator. 4. Remove radiator shrouds. 5. Remove drive belts. 6. Remove cooling fan. 7. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 8. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. 9. Pushing timing chain tensioner sleeve, apply a stopper pin so it does not return. Then remove the chain tensioner assembly. Page 848 Part 1 Page 1234 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2214 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5554 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1387 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5327 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3168 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3562 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1081 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3747 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3433 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5612 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5611 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 490 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1176 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2408 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3215 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1425 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2976 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5804 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3776 Description Part 1 Page 5825 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4903 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2520 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4912 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1740 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 5449 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 273 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2153 Page 240 Diagnosis Sensor Unit: Service and Repair Diagnosis Sensor Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect battery ground cable and wait for at least 3 minutes. - Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new ones. - Check diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation. - Check diagnosis sensor unit to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If they show any visible signs of damage, replace them with new ones. - Check diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure they are free of deformities or rust. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check" for details. 1. Disconnect connectors for driver and passenger air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove console box. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY". 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector. 4. Remove ground bolt and diagnostic sensor unit fixing bolts. Use TAMPER RESISTANT TORX (Size T50) to remove special bolts. Then remove the diagnosis sensor unit. NOTE: To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence. Page 937 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5553 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3553 Part 1 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 43 Component View A Smart Entrance Control Unit Page 3418 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3257 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5618 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 468 Description Part 1 Page 4829 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3389 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5040 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-POS-01 Connector Views EC-REF-01 Connector Views Page 3369 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5733 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3622 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2345 Oil Cooler: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Drain engine oil and coolant. ^ Do not spill coolant on the drive belt. 2. Remove oil cooler. ^ Inspect the oil cooler after removing it. 3. Installation is in reverse order of removal. ^ When installing the oil cooler, align the oil cooler stopper with the stopper of the oil cooler bracket. Page 4915 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4384 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1685 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. Page 805 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3117 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2848 Thermostat Housing: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Valve opening temperature 95°C Valve lift More than 8.0 mm/108°C Page 2628 D. Remove the 10mm bolt holding the metal EVAP purge pipe to the intake collector. Remove the four throttle chamber bolts (6mm socket head capscrews) - see Figure 4. E. Remove the throttle chamber gasket and discard (see Figure 5). CAUTION: DO NOT allow anything to fall into the intake manifold or intake tube. F. Remove all ignition coils by disconnecting each coil harness connector and removing the screw, holding each coil to the engine. Notes: ^ The harness of each ignition coil is numbered (1 through 6) near the connector to assist in proper re-installation. ^ You must lift the throttle chamber slightly to reach the # 4 ignition coil (see Figure 6). Page 1980 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Type ..................................................................................................................................................... Nissan A/C System Lubricant Type S or equivalent. Page 1461 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3748 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 746 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 2216 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 939 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4186 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2654 2.60 mm 260 2.61 mm 261 2.62 mm 262 2.63 mm 263 2.64 mm 264 2.65 mm 265 2.66 mm 266 2.67 mm 267 2.68 mm 268 2.69 mm 269 2.70 mm 270 2.71 mm 271 2.72 mm 272 2.73 mm 273 2.74 mm 274 2.75 mm 275 2.76 mm 276 2.77 mm 277 2.78 mm 278 2.79 mm 279 2.80 mm 280 2.81 mm 281 2.82 mm 282 2.83 mm 283 2.84 mm 284 2.85 mm 285 2.86 mm 286 2.87 mm 287 2.88 mm 288 2.89 mm 289 2.90 mm 290 2.91 mm 291 Page 2932 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 3106 EC-PHASE-01 Page 5124 EC-FLS3-01 Page 492 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4603 Part 1 Page 4554 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1563 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 500 EC-RP/SEN-01 Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85 V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 V Page 4585 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 373 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1678 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Page 252 Description Part 1 Page 3470 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5502 EC-VSS-01 Page 3957 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 757 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2971 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Cooling System - Leaks/Overheating Radiator Cap: Customer Interest Cooling System - Leaks/Overheating Classification: EM04-002 Reference: NTB04-018 Date: February 06, 2004 RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION DURING COOLANT SYSTEM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1999 and Later Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM: An applied vehicle has any of the following symptoms: ^ Leaking radiator ^ Overheating cooling system OR If you removed the radiator cap for any other reason. ACTION: ^ Look for a "swollen" (enlarged) radiator cap gasket. See Figure 1a and 1b. ^ An enlarged radiator cap gasket can cause the cap to not vent properly. This can result in coolant loss and overheating. ^ See the Service Procedure for more details. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3769 EC-FTTS-01 Connector Views Page 2160 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Fastener Tightening Torque 118 - 147 Nm Page 905 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 992 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1414 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3598 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5039 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Service and Repair Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair 4WD Model Page 5673 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3551 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3621 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1178 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling system (With reservior) 9.2 L Page 3258 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 180 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3387 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 811 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2549 Step 25 - 27 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Page 4639 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1696 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. Page 3586 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5671 Description Part 1 Page 645 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2417 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5042 EC-REF-01 Page 4285 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 178 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3918 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1587 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3791 Part 1 Page 1772 Step 25 - 27 Page 2591 Step 11 - 13 Page 3038 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4373 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4122 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5685 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2822 EC-ECTS-01 Page 782 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views EC-FLS1-01 Connector Views EC-FLS2-01 Connector Views EC-FLS3-01 Connector Views Page 4495 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3677 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2947 ECM / ECM Harness Connector Page 3489 EC-TP/SW-01 Page 4696 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2279 2.60 mm 260 2.61 mm 261 2.62 mm 262 2.63 mm 263 2.64 mm 264 2.65 mm 265 2.66 mm 266 2.67 mm 267 2.68 mm 268 2.69 mm 269 2.70 mm 270 2.71 mm 271 2.72 mm 272 2.73 mm 273 2.74 mm 274 2.75 mm 275 2.76 mm 276 2.77 mm 277 2.78 mm 278 2.79 mm 279 2.80 mm 280 2.81 mm 281 2.82 mm 282 2.83 mm 283 2.84 mm 284 2.85 mm 285 2.86 mm 286 2.87 mm 287 2.88 mm 288 2.89 mm 289 2.90 mm 290 2.91 mm 291 Page 3718 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4905 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5034 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 405 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1087 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment 1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly. 2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in "N" position. 3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible. 5. Reinstall any part removed. 6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Page 4988 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 13 Component View A Smart Entrance Control Unit Page 3480 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3370 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Locations Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 4331 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1092 Description Part 1 Page 5315 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 206 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Page 5494 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 784 EC-FLS2-01 Page 3681 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 431 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4799 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 5657 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5702 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Views EC-IVC-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVC-L-01 Connector Views Page 1174 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 801 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3047 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 176 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5237 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3158 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5541 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 3439 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2853 Water Pump: Specifications Water pump Pump assembly 8.5 - 10.7 Nm Pump cover 10 - 13 Nm Drain plug 7.8 - 11.8 Nm Chain tensioner cover 10 - 13 Nm Chain tensioner 7.0 - 9.3 Nm Page 4870 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. Page 5155 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3865 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 861 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1985 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Manual Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large gas leakage occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: - Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 Step 1 - 3 Step 4 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING Page 1702 Outside Degree Minute Page 1578 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5801 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5653 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4725 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation System Description Operation HO2S1 HEATER System Description Operation HO2S2 HEATER HO2S1 Page 914 EC-O2H1B2-01 Page 753 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 278 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5523 Part 1 Page 277 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3559 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5401 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4248 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3079 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1672 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 1462 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Locations ECM Page 182 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 975 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4653 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3484 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5227 Type Of Standardized Relays Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Cranking Signal: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 4 Page 2029 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable and fuel lines. Page 1257 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4983 Part 1 Page 1570 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4514 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3348 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1293 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5202 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Special Refilling Tool Classification: TE02-001a Reference: NTB02-011a Date: March 11, 2002 ESSENTIAL TOOL: ENGINE COOLANT REFILL TOOL This bulletin amends NTB02-011. This version has the addition of a Service Procedure. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION If for any reason the vehicle's cooling system needs to be filled with coolant due to a service repair or maintenance, use the Coolant Refill Tool # J-45695. ^ Using this tool properly will ensure complete filling without trapped air bubbles in the cooling system. ^ Air pockets in the cooling system can cause: A) Overheating B) Poor heater performance C) Gurgling noise from the heater core To ensure the tool is used correctly, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool and the Service Procedure in this Bulletin. Page 2501 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 499 EC-RP/SEN-01 Connector Views Page 4522 Part 3 Page 1532 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3176 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5843 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4472 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 5658 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 700 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4478 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 5404 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5474 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3194 Description Part 1 Page 940 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3869 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3934 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-POS-01 Page 2970 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1320 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5064 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21-26 Nm, 16-19 ft lb Page 1333 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4539 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. Page 2397 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 2917 Page 5369 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4535 Part 6 Page 2462 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 677 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4678 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 1059 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3833 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5355 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3936 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the gear teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). CKP SENSOR Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan (upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead Center) signal (120° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal (120° signal). Page 701 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-POS-01 Connector Views EC-REF-01 Connector Views Page 2381 6. Remove valve oil seal. 7. Apply engine oil to new valve oil seal and install it with Tool. Page 4173 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3219 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4126 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4299 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2937 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 1539 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Component Description The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 5806 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Tires: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 5219 Description Part 1 Page 1573 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5319 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4571 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4739 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3904 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4431 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5731 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5005 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Oil Filter / Crankshaft Pulley / Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Harness Connector Oil Pan / Crankshaft Position Sensor Harness Connector Page 3917 Part 1 Page 4553 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3415 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 498 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3302 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2475 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2471 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3646 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 173 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 553 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3863 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 218 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 722 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1187 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2630 ^ Ensure there are no gaps and bulges between the coil body and the rubber boot (see Figure 9). 7. Install the repaired ignition coils (with the new resistor assembly) to the engine. CAUTION: When re-installing the ignition coils, make sure that the coils are correctly connected to the engine harness. 8. Re-install all other parts removed in reverse order. NOTE: Install a new throttle chamber gasket when re-installing parts (see PARTS INFORMATION section for further information). 9. Check to ensure the incident has been resolved by repeating steps 1 and 2. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 5173 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1446 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5499 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2899 a. Look at the crack(s) and confirm it is within the Outer Ribs of the Front Tube (see Figure 4). ^ If the crack(s) is within the Outer Ribs, go to the next step. ^ If the crack(s) is NOT within the Outer Ribs, this bulletin does not apply. b. Thoroughly clean the cracked side seams to remove all dust, dirt, and debris. c. Completely fill the provided (syringe) Applicator with 6ml of Exhaust Sealant. ^ This amount (6ml) of Sealant will be used for one Exhaust Patch. d. Apply 6ml of Sealant evenly between the two bumps ONLY of each Exhaust Patch (see Figure 5). e. Install the Exhaust Patches to both Front Tube Side Seams, making sure: Page 2689 Coolant: Service and Repair Flushing Cooling System 1. Open air relief plug. 2. Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief holes, then close air relief plugs. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap. 3. Run engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Rev engine two or three times under no-load. 5. Stop engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain water. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. Page 4628 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5415 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap oil level gauge etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. 4. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. 7. Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. Page 555 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3239 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3902 Description Part 1 Page 4746 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1171 Description Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4232 EC-PHASE-01 Connector Views Page 4128 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2466 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1703 Alignment: Specifications Alignment Camber Minimum -0 deg 35' Degree Minute Nominal 0 deg 10' Maximum 0 deg 55' Left And Right Difference 45' or less Caster Minimum 2 deg 15' Degree Minute Nominal 3 deg 00' Maximum 3 deg 45' Left And Right Difference 45' or less Kingpin Inclination Minimum 13 deg 35' Degree Minute Nominal 14 deg 20' Maximum 15 deg 05' Total Toe-In Minimum 1 mm Distance (A - B) / Radial Tire Nominal 2 mm Maximum 3 mm Total Toe-In Minimum 5' Angle (Left Plus Right) / Degree Minute / Radial Tire Nominal 10' Maximum 15' Wheel Turning Angle Minimum 30 deg 00' Full Turn: On Power Steering Models, Wheel Turning Force Inside Degree Minute (At Circumference Of Steering Wheel) Of 98 To 147 N (10 To 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) With Engine Idle. Nominal 33 deg 00' Inside Degree Minute Maximum 34 deg 00' Inside Degree Minute Wheel Turning Angle Minimum 28 deg 00' Full Turn: On Power Steering Models, Wheel Turning Force Outside Degree Minute (At Circumference Of Steering Wheel) Of 98 To 147 N (10 To 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) With Engine Idle. Nominal 31 deg 00' Outside Degree Minute Maximum 32 deg 00' Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5159 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5210 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 2734 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3601 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5145 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4510 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3867 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 744 Step 4 - 7 Page 2900 ^ The bumps on the Patches align with the Outer Ribs on the Front Tube (see Figure 6). ^ The Patches are firmly pressed onto the Side Seams. f. Install the Band Clamps around the Front Tube, making sure: ^ The Band Clamps are correctly positioned outside the Front Tube Ribs and Exhaust Patch Bumps (see Figure 6). ^ The Band Clamp Bolt is placed between the Patch and the lower surface of the Front Tube (see Figure 6). CAUTION: Do NOT place the Band Clamp Bolt on the bottom of the Front Tube as it can pick up road debris. ^ The Bolts are tightened to 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (.4 - .56 Kg-m, 2.9-4.0 ft-lb). ^ The excess Band Clamp material is cut off within 5 mm after each Bolt. g. Wipe away any excess sealant that seeped from the patches with a paper towel or other similar material that you can throw away immediately. Do not use a shop rag that may come in contact with someone else's hand later. h. Repeat the above steps for the other Front Tube if applicable. I. Start the engine and let it idle slowly for 10 minutes to cure the Sealant. Page 1123 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Page 1307 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5418 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1067 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1902 12. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating steps 5 through 8 until coolant level no longer drops. - Clean excess coolant from engine. Page 5699 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3802 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Locations Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 5182 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3846 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2885 ^ The bumps on the Patches align with the Outer Ribs on the Front Tube (see Figure 6). ^ The Patches are firmly pressed onto the Side Seams. f. Install the Band Clamps around the Front Tube, making sure: ^ The Band Clamps are correctly positioned outside the Front Tube Ribs and Exhaust Patch Bumps (see Figure 6). ^ The Band Clamp Bolt is placed between the Patch and the lower surface of the Front Tube (see Figure 6). CAUTION: Do NOT place the Band Clamp Bolt on the bottom of the Front Tube as it can pick up road debris. ^ The Bolts are tightened to 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (.4 - .56 Kg-m, 2.9-4.0 ft-lb). ^ The excess Band Clamp material is cut off within 5 mm after each Bolt. g. Wipe away any excess sealant that seeped from the patches with a paper towel or other similar material that you can throw away immediately. Do not use a shop rag that may come in contact with someone else's hand later. h. Repeat the above steps for the other Front Tube if applicable. I. Start the engine and let it idle slowly for 10 minutes to cure the Sealant. Page 3217 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 824 EC-IATS-01 Connector Views Page 5675 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5760 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1264 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5163 EC-IATS-01 Connector Views Page 760 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5589 Description Part 1 Page 685 Part 1 Page 517 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check 1. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector B12. 3. Connect a resistor (80 Ohm) between fuel tank gauge unit harness connector terminals 2 and 3. 4. Turn ignition switch "ON". The fuel warning lamp should come on. NOTE: ECM might store the 1st trip DTC P0180 during this inspection. If the DTC is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after reconnecting fuel tank gauge unit harness connector. Refer to "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION". Page 1151 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5361 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5343 EC-TP/SW-01 Page 4450 Page 5393 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 852 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 412 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3131 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Locations Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box Page 2220 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position camshaft position engine speed and engine coolant temperature. Then the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the camshaft timing control valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Page 207 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 657 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4858 Part 8 Page 4679 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater Resistance [at 25 deg C (77 deg F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Resistance [at 25 °C (77 °F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations Nissan does not provide a location for a cabin air filter. Page 5484 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 153 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 3961 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3569 EC-PNP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 5191 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2391 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3133 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4724 EC-O2S2B2-01 Page 34 10. Select the "Yes" button on the "Self Diagnosis" screen to begin program loading (see Figure 5). NOTE: Do not turn the power off or remove the CD-ROM during loading, as this will interrupt the loading process. 11. The loading process is complete when all the red lights (between "Start" and "End") are illuminated (see Figure 6) and when a "double-beep" sound is heard. This usually takes about three minutes. 12. After the "double beep" sound is heard, remove the CD-ROM from the navigation system CD slot, then insert the NEW mapping disc. Place the programming CD-ROM in its storage case. NOTE: After you insert the Mapping disc, the screen will show a specific street intersection. This street intersection is pre-determined by the Mapping disc and is used together with the satellite information to make corrections and determine your location. The table provides the pre-determined street intersection for each Map Coverage Area (MCA) for new "X5.1" mapping CDs. 13. Drive the vehicle for at least 20 to 30 minutes. This will allow GPS initialization. NOTE: GPS initialization is complete when the satellite icon, at the top left corner of the screen, turns green. 14. Leave the Mapping disc in the CD-ROM slot when you've completed the loading process. 15. Return the new programming CD-ROM to the Service Manager. NOTE: In some cases, the customer may provide your dealership (i.e., the Service Manager) with the new programming CD-ROM. In this case make sure the programming CD-ROM is returned to the customer. Page 4015 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 5139 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4336 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4597 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1692 Page 1515 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1627 The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. Page 5373 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1544 Consult-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode Page 1483 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4402 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 756 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2110 4. Resurface both front rotors using an On-Car Brake Lathe. IMPORTANT NOTES: ^ An on-car brake lathe (such as the ProCut(TM) PFM9.0 or equivalent) is a required essential tool and must be used to perform warranty brake rotor surfacing. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM9.0 can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. ^ The on-car brake lathe is more effective in reducing brake rotor run out than the conventional off-car lathe method. ^ When using the on-car brake lathe, prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS speed sensors. ^ Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS speed sensor's magnet. It is best to clean the ABS sensor with the rotor removed. ^ If the rotor must be removed for any reason, mark the exact location (rotor to axle hub) before removing the rotor (see Figure 6). This will make sure you reinstall the rotor back to the same location. ^ Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to the proper torque specification. Uneven or high torque applied to the lugs may distort the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. 5. After the rotors have been resurfaced: ^ Recheck the rotor thickness. Specification: 26.0 mm (1.024 in.) minimum thickness. ^ Check the rotor runout. Specification: 0.03 mm (0.001 in) maximum runout. NOTE: Runout specification is new, and is slightly less than what is shown in the ESM. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Electric Load Sensor: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 3468 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1719 Step 7 - 10 Page 5559 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5137 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3668 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4137 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5245 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2225 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove engine cover and throttle wire. 5. Remove air duct with air cleaner case. 6. Remove harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coils. 7. Remove throttle body. Left bank Right bank 8. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connectors, then remove ignition coils. 9. Remove all spark plugs. ^ Clean area around plug with compressed air before removing the spark plug. 1 of 2 2 of 2 10. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. Page 1159 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3343 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3464 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4701 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5262 Special/Commercial Service Tools Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 2496 Description Part 1 Page 979 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 909 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 2 Page 5084 Step 8 - 10 Page 2799 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1203 EC-PRE/SE-01 Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] 470 - 570 Ohm Page 3167 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2261 Page 3974 EC-KS-01 Connector Views Page 3991 Step 19 - 20 Page 2802 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3186 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-POS-01 Connector Views EC-REF-01 Connector Views Page 3608 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Page 2409 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3204 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1152 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1529 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3297 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3849 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation P0121, P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch" which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. P0510 CTP SENSOR Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 817 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3278 Description Part 1 Page 901 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4247 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2596 Step 25 - 27 Page 5215 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 RH Harness Connector / Engine Front Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Left Bank) / Transmission / Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Right Bank) Page 3840 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1056 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 163 ECM / ECM Harness Connector Page 1491 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Diagrams Page 4761 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 565 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Removal and Installation Radiator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove undercover. 2. Remove suspension member stay. 3. Drain coolant from radiator. 4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. 5. Remove upper and lower radiator shroud. 6. Remove A/T oil cooler hoses. (A/T) 7. Disconnect reservoir tank hose. 8. Remove radiator mounting bracket. 9. Remove radiator. 10. After repairing or replacing radiator, install any part removed in reverse order of removal. Page 548 Description Part 1 Testing and Inspection Air Door Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Mode Switch Recirculation Switch Page 2720 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1698 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). Page 993 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5445 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1297 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4226 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3626 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3986 Step 1 - 2 Page 134 Page 3358 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 4897 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3327 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4219 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5296 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4974 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4684 Description Part 1 Page 4568 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1427 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 865 EC-KS-01 Page 2526 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2503 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3517 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4961 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No. signal. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No. signal. Page 5473 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4406 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5205 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 4105 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft, to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Thoroughly wipe off engine oil around adjusting shim using a rag. 3. Using a extra-fine screwdriver, turn the round hole of the adjusting shim in the direction of the arrow. 4. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See figure.), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 5. Rotate Tool (A) (See figure.) so that valve lifter is pushed down. 6. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: ^ Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. ^ Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 7. Remove Tool (A). Page 4197 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Pulley / Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Page 673 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1158 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 762 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5581 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation P0121, P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch" which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. P0510 CTP SENSOR Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 2722 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3547 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3578 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1749 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Locations Component View E Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5725 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5659 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2072 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 871 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 3620 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1382 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 369 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Gap (Nominal): .................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Spark plug Torque: ...................................................................................................................................... 19.6 - 29.4 Nm (2.0 - 2.9 kg-m, 15 - 22 ft. lbs.) Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression presure Standard 1275 kPa Minimum 981 kPa Differential limit between cylinders 98 kPa Cylinder number See image Page 3912 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3246 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF". WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 4947 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3844 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3341 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1349 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4284 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 133 Page 4117 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1066 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4904 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Brake anb Clutch Fluid Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid*3 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) *3: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer Page 2695 Fan Clutch: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION Check fan coupling for rough operation, wobbling, oil leakage or bent bimetal. After assembly, verify the fan does not wobble or flap while the engine is running. WARNING: ^ When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from moving parts such as drive belts and fan. Testing and Inspection Combination Switch - Check Page 4153 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air the greater the heat loss. Therefore the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4491 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4349 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4889 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5820 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3443 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3303 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4257 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3717 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4744 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4490 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4942 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5377 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 725 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3030 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1242 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2581 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 1583 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4304 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 642 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1108 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3676 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4569 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1381 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1662 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Page 704 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the gear teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). CKP SENSOR Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan (upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead Center) signal (120° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal (120° signal). Page 3377 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3380 Part 1 Page 5492 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5689 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: By Symptom Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 174 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4267 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4176 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3458 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 826 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 4026 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 5830 Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation Component Description The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed under normal purge conditions the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows "EVAP Control System (Small Leak)" diagnosis. Page 4136 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2913 Page 4664 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 1314 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5497 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1565 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5489 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1096 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5666 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Page 5456 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 518 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP AND FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT 1. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to "Fuel Pressure Release". 2. Remove inspection hole cover located behind the rear seat. 3. Disconnect harness connectors and fuel tubes from upper plate of fuel level sensor unit. - Put mating marks on tubes for correct installation. 4. Remove fuel level sensor unit retainer and fuel level sensor unit. 5. Disconnect the quick connectors as follows. 1. Put mating marks on tubes and connectors for correct installation. 2. Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs, and pull out the tube inserted in the retainer. CAUTION: The tube can be removed when the push in tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary. - Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector. - Keep the connecting portion of the tubes and quick connectors clean. 6. Remove fuel pump with bracket while lifting the pawl of the fuel pump bracket upward. Page 5652 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5810 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3179 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3306 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5600 Part 1 Part 2 Page 638 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3310 EC-IATS-01 Page 1315 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2940 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 3393 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3385 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3199 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4824 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5614 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5536 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3477 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2972 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 351 Description Part 1 Page 3048 Part 1 Page 686 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3519 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5258 EC-O2S2B1-01 Page 318 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 324 Components Locations Overall View Page 485 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 1136 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3794 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2998 Part 7 Page 1353 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2659 10. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 11. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 12. Set No. 5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 13. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 14. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. If they are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. ^ Intake manifold collectors ^ RH and LH rocker covers ^ All spark plugs ^ All ignition coils Cooling System - Water Pump O-Ring Design Change Water Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Water Pump O-Ring Design Change Classification: EM02-003 Reference: NTB02-050 Date: April 23, 2002 VQ ENGINE WATER PUMP 0-RING APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) 2002 Maxima (A33) 2002 Altima (L31) APPLIED DATE: See Figure 1 APPLIED ENGINE: VQ35DE SERVICE INFORMATION If, for any reason, the water pump needs to be serviced, please note that: ^ The front 0-ring (on the water pump) has changed ^ The new 0-ring is now black with a white paint mark instead of orange in color see Figure 1) Page 3809 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 596 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3556 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1022 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1467 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3134 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1021 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2215 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1942 Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Changing Differential Gear Oil 1. Drain oil from drain plug and refill with new gear oil. 2. Check oil level. Oil grade and viscosity: See "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Oil capacity: Front 1.85 l (3-7/8 US pt, 3-1/4 Imp pt) Rear 2.8 l (5-7/8 US pt, 4-7/8 Imp pt) Filler plug: Front Tightening Torque: 39 - 59 N-m (4 - 6 kg-m, 29 - 43 ft-lb) Rear Tightening Torque: 59 - 118 N-m (6 - 12 kg-m, 43 - 87 ft-lb) Drain plug: Front Tightening Torque: 59 - 98 N-m (6-10 kg-m, 43 - 72 ft-lb) Rear Tightening Torque: 59 - 118 N-m (6 - 12 kg-m, 43 - 87 ft-lb) Page 3594 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4017 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 2787 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5551 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2687 Coolant: Service and Repair Refilling Engine Coolant 1. Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug. 2. Close and tighten cylinder block drain plugs securely if removed. - Apply sealant to the thread of cylinder block drain plugs. Tightening Torque: 8 -11 N.m (0.8 -1.2 kg-m, 70-104 in-lb) Front side Tightening Torque: 18 - 21 N.m (1.8 - 2.2 kg-m, 13 -15 ft-lb) Right side Use Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent. 3. Fill radiator slowly with coolant. If air relief plug was removed, fill until coolant spills from the air relief plug, then install air relief plug. 4. Fill reservoir tank if removed with coolant up to the MAX level and install radiator cap. Use Genuine Nissan antifreeze coolant or equivalent mixed with demineralized water/distilled water. For coolant mixture ratio, refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Coolant capacity (Without reservoir tank): 8.6 l (9-1/8 US qt, 7-5/8 Imp qt) Reservoir tank capacity (for MAX level): 0.6 l (5/8 US qt, 1/2 Imp qt) Pour coolant through coolant filler neck slowly to allow air in system to escape. 5. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature with radiator cap installed. 6. Run engine at 2,500 rpm for 10 seconds and return to idle speed. - Repeat 2 or 3 times. Watch coolant temperature gauge so as not to overheat the engine. 7. Stop engine and cool it down. - Cool down using a fan to reduce the time. 8. Refill reservoir tank to Max line with coolant. 9. Repeat steps 5 through step 8 two or more times until coolant level no longer drops. 10. Check cooling system for leaks with engine running. 11. Warm up engine, and check for sound of coolant flow while running engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm with heater temperature control set at several positions between COOL and HOT. Sound may be noticeable at heater water cock. Page 3243 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 420 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3932 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3152 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3740 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Mechanical Specifications Thermostat Housing: Mechanical Specifications Page 4999 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 160 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3634 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 559 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2547 Step 21 - 22 Page 5530 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5010 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1235 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4893 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2583 Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Target idle speed*1 No-load*2 (in "P" or "N" position) M/T: 750 ± 50 rpm A/T: 750 ± 50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In "P" or "N" position 825 rpm or more Ignition timing*1 In "P" or "N" position 15 deg ± 5 deg BTDC *1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected *2: Under the following conditions: - Air conditioner switch: OFF - Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) - Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Page 3163 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5359 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3420 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 896 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 181 Part 1 Page 3205 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2431 Timing Chain: Removal and Replacement TIMING CHAIN Removal 1. Release fuel pressure. 2. Remove battery. 3. Remove radiator. 4. Drain engine oil. 5. Remove drive belts and idler pulley with brackets. 6. Remove cooling fan with bracket. 7. Remove engine cover. 8. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collector, blow-by hose, vacuum hoses, fuel hoses, water hoses, wires, harnesses, connectors and so on. 9. Remove the air compressor, and tie it down using rope or the like to keep it from interfering. Page 4292 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1758 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 4933 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3139 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5183 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5375 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5213 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 1223 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt Step 1 39 Nm to 49 Nm Step 2 Put a paint mark on the crankshaft pulley Step 3 60° to 66° additional Page 1028 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5515 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5508 Description Part 1 Page 1430 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4378 Part 1 Page 3731 EC-MAFS-01 Page 3750 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4822 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1514 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2815 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 415 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations ECM / ECM Harness Connector Overall View Component View D Page 3146 EC-ECTS-01 Page 5637 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 154 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 3583 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2188 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2715 Part 1 Part 2 Page 262 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3528 EC-TPS-01 Connector Views Page 3039 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Components Locations Overall View Component View C Page 5358 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 814 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5736 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3778 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2855 Water Pump: Service and Repair REMOVAL CAUTION: ^ When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. ^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. ^ After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. 1. Remove undercover. 2. Remove suspension member stay. 3. Drain coolant from radiator. 4. Remove radiator shrouds. 5. Remove drive belts. 6. Remove cooling fan. 7. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 8. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. 9. Pushing timing chain tensioner sleeve, apply a stopper pin so it does not return. Then remove the chain tensioner assembly. Page 1009 Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 5328 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2973 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5621 EC-PNP/SW-01 Page 2209 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4430 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 470 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3426 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2080 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 2660 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft, to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Thoroughly wipe off engine oil around adjusting shim using a rag. 3. Using a extra-fine screwdriver, turn the round hole of the adjusting shim in the direction of the arrow. 4. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See figure.), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 5. Rotate Tool (A) (See figure.) so that valve lifter is pushed down. 6. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: ^ Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. ^ Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 7. Remove Tool (A). Page 3081 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3765 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1276 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Diagram Information and Instructions Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5827 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3962 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2710 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3282 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2497 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3924 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2966 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3971 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5550 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3754 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4690 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1126 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Page 5448 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1658 Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander Page 3807 EC-TP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 5179 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid Changing A/T Fluid 1. Warm up A/T fluid. 2. Stop engine. 3. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. Always refill same volume with drained fluid. Fluid grade: Nissan Matic "D" (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Fluid capacity (With torque converter): 2WD, 4WD 8.5 l (9 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt) Drain plug: Tightening Torque: 29 - 39 N-m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) 4. Run engine at idle speed for five minutes. 5. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to " Checking A/T Fluid". If fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. Page 4214 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1432 Part 1 Page 5603 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4850 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 929 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4534 Part 5 Page 4405 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4869 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 4945 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5518 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 646 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3560 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3564 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4339 Part 1 Page 1138 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4546 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1510 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1280 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3323 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3742 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1475 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1379 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4298 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Navigation System - Multiple Malfunctions Technical Service Bulletin # 01-058 Date: 010831 Navigation System - Multiple Malfunctions Classification: EL01-016 Reference: NTB01-058 Date: August 31, 2001 NAVIGATION SYSTEM DISPLAY FREEZE, UN-INITIATED RE-ROUTING, AND NO VOICE GUIDANCE SYMPTOMS APPLIED VEHICLE: 2001 Pathfinder (R50) 2002 Pathfinder (R50), with X5.1 mapping CDs ONLY 2002 Maxima (A33), with X5.1 mapping CDs ONLY APPLIED VIN: 2002 Pathfinder before: JN8DR09X*2W651209 JN8DR09Y*2W703911 2002 Maxima before: JN1DA31A82T000792 (w/side air bags)* JN1DA31D52T408662 (w/o side air bags)* JN1DA31A92T304455 (w/side air bags)* JN1DA31D22T201596 (w/o side air bags)** All 2001 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED DATE: 2002 Pathfinder before: August 21, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If an applied vehicle exhibits any of the symptoms listed below: ^ Display (screen) Freezes: The display freezes and the system stops functioning (including the A/C controls) when the vehicle is driven through a certain point/location. ^ Un-initiated Re-routing: After programming a route, the system will (during that route) re-route (re-calculate) to the pre-programmed destination point. ^ No Voice Guidance: After programming a route, the system will (during that route) stop providing voice guidance to the destination point. An upgraded navigation operating system (0/S) software CD is now available and can be installed to resolve the incidents, should they occur. All vehicles prior to the applied VINs that are currently in the dealer's inventory should be updated with the new 0/S software CD. This bulletin contains: ^ Information about the navigation 0/S software upgrade CD. ^ Installation procedure of the navigation 0/S software upgrade CD. NOTE: The above symptoms apply to "X5.1" (mapping) CDS ONLY. Service Procedure Summary ^ Determine which navigation operating system (0/S) software version the vehicle is equipped with ^ Apply the new navigation operating system (0/S) software CD (if needed) Install the new "X5.1" mapping CD Background: Page 4025 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 4393 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 617 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3664 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4528 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Page 3565 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1132 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5090 Description Part 1 Page 3210 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5104 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1979 Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Lubricant Total in system and compressor (service part) amount Capacity ........................................ ............................................................................................................................................................. 180 ml (6.1 fl oz) Page 5189 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1589 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1479 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4705 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5276 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4337 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3388 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5423 EC-PNP/SW-01 Connector Views Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Brake anb Clutch Fluid Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid*3 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) *3: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer Page 3623 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2587 Overall Inspection Sequence Page 4242 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5285 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3091 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5018 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3144 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4699 Part 1 Page 4812 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 3002 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 604 Part 1 Page 4364 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4274 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 5234 Part 1 Page 1336 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2752 Radiator: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Cap relief pressure Standard 78 - 98 kPa Limit 59 - 98 kPa Leakage test pressure 157 kPa Page 1688 2. Tighten the sliding force adjusting screw slightly then re-tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting screw (see Figure 6). 3. Re-check the sliding force as outlined under the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 as necessary until the steering rack sliding force is at the high end of the specification. NOTE: Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Page 3185 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 354 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 634 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1309 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3216 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4394 EC-MIL/DL-01 Connector Views Page 4842 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1001 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1107 Part 1 Page 841 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5842 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2597 Step 28 - 30 Testing and Inspection Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering components, suspension components, and tires, or after adjusting wheel alignment, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. CAUTION: To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-II. (Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.) 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "CONTROL MODULE INPUT ITEM", and "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" is within 0 ± 3.5 degrees. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 5845 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1405 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2795 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3520 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1676 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 2760 ^ Grip the crimped edge and bend it upwards so that Tool slips off. Do not bend excessively. ^ In areas where Tool cannot be used, use a screwdriver to bend the edge up. Be careful not to damage tank. 2. Make sure the edge stands straight up. 3. Remove oil cooler from tank. ASSEMBLY 1. Install oil cooler. Pay attention to direction of conical washer. Page 4536 Part 7 Page 4598 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 380 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5059 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3715 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2499 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5598 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 834 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 348 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3483 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4602 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4428 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1868 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Changing Oil Filter 1. Remove oil filter with Tool. WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot. The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. Refer to "Oil Filter". 2. Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block. Coat rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil. 3. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. 4. Add engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". - Clean excess oil from engine. Page 1838 11. Install new shim using a suitable tool. ^ Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 12. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 13. Remove Tool (B). 14. Remove Tool (A). 15. Recheck valve clearance. Valve clearance Page 3756 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 882 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1653 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 5524 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5778 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2510 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2357 3. Install front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. 4. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of aluminum oil pan. ^ Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. 5. Apply liquid gasket to inner sealing surface as shown in figure. ^ Be sure liquid gasket is 4.0 to 5.0 mm (0.157 to 0.197 inch) or 4.5 to 5.5 mm (0.177 to 0.217 inch) wide. ^ Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating. 6. Install O-rings, cylinder block and oil pump body. 7. Install aluminum oil pan. ^ Tighten bolts in numerical order. ^ Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil. Page 5115 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1645 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 259 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4477 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Locations Component View A Page 3903 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3898 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Oil Filter / Crankshaft Pulley / Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Harness Connector Oil Pan / Crankshaft Position Sensor Harness Connector Page 844 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2880 Page 4024 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 4138 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Specifications Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760 Ohm MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550 Ohm Page 1837 8. Blow air into the hole to separate adjusting shim from valve lifter. 9. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. 10. Determine replacement adjusting shim size following formula. ^ Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. ^ Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake: N = R + [M - 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch)] Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.33 mm (0.0130 inch)] Shims are available in 64 sizes from 2.32 mm (0.0913 inch) to 2.95 mm (0.1161 inch), in steps of 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch). ^ Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 5384 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation P0121, P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch" which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. P0510 CTP SENSOR Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 1328 Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 5214 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater Resistance [at 25 deg C (77 deg F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Resistance [at 25 °C (77 °F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Page 3083 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1032 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1002 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5376 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3301 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 662 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1113 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4634 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5426 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment 1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly. 2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in "N" position. 3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible. 5. Reinstall any part removed. 6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Page 4511 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5289 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3033 Description Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Electric Load Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1771 Step 23 - 24 Page 1183 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 407 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2212 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4693 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2517 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1474 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1637 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 3883 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5738 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression presure Standard 1275 kPa Minimum 981 kPa Differential limit between cylinders 98 kPa Cylinder number See image Page 1076 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3421 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4521 Part 2 Page 5152 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2490 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 4045 Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. Page 3359 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 434 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Page 3414 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1160 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4609 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5297 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5438 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3699 Description Part 1 Page 5729 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 172 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5844 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5444 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3542 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3145 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 2993 Part 2 Page 4937 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4851 Part 1 Page 2960 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3196 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3357 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 4686 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 727 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3876 Part 1 Page 3132 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3151 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Oil Filter / Crankshaft Pulley / Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Harness Connector Oil Pan / Crankshaft Position Sensor Harness Connector Page 4496 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4620 EC-AAC/V-01 Page 5605 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1181 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4791 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 967 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 4123 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3709 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4853 Part 3 Page 410 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4596 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2992 Part 1 Page 3383 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations Alarm Module: Locations ECM Overall View Component View G Page 2670 10. Remove the 3 water pump fixing bolts. Secure a gap between water pump gear and timing chain, by turning crankshaft pulley 20° backwards. 11. Put M8 bolts to two water pump fixing bolt holes. 12. Tighten M8 bolts by turning half turn alternately until they reach timing chain rear case. ^ In order to prevent damages to water pump or timing chain rear case, do not tighten one bolt continuously. Always turn each bolt half turn each time. 13. Lift up water pump and remove it. ^ When lifting up water pump, do not allow water pump gear to hit timing chain. INSPECTION 1. Check for badly rusted or corroded body assembly. Page 4007 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] 470 - 570 Ohm Page 3530 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation P0121, P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch" which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. P0510 CTP SENSOR Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 261 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 478 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 266 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3878 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2714 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4348 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4408 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5682 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4270 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1319 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2961 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4148 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3931 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4365 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 73 A/C Relay Available Valve Shims Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve shim Thickness Identification mark 2.32 mm 232 2.33 mm 233 2.34 mm 234 2.35 mm 235 2.36 mm 236 2.37 mm 237 2.38 mm 238 2.39 mm 239 2.40 mm 240 2.41 mm 241 2.42 mm 242 2.43 mm 243 2.44 mm 244 2.45 mm 245 2.46 mm 246 2.47 mm 247 2.48 mm 248 2.49 mm 249 2.50 mm 250 2.51 mm 251 2.52 mm 252 2.53 mm 253 2.54 mm 254 2.55 mm 255 2.56 mm 256 2.57 mm 257 2.58 mm 258 2.59 mm 259 Page 2980 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1520 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4308 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5564 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1755 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 5016 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5650 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4786 Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 5479 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5712 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4262 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 873 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 5664 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Bearing Caps Step 1 1.96 Nm Tighten in the order of 7 to 10, then tighten 1 to 6. Step 2 5.88 Nm Tighten in the numerical order. Step 3 Bolts 1-6 9.02 - 11.8 Nm Tighten in the order of 1 to 6. Bolts 7-10 8.3 - 10.3 Nm Tighten in the order of 7 to 10 Page 5482 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Specifications Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760 Ohm MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550 Ohm Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Wheel Hub (Locking): All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 5597 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2443 LH rocker cover 17. Install RH and LH rocker covers. Rocker cover tightening procedure: Tighten in numerical order as shown in the figure. a. Tighten bolts 1 to 10 in that order to 6.9 to 8.8 Nm (0.7 to 0.9 kg-m, 61 to 78 inch lbs.). b. Then tighten bolts 1 to 10 as indicated in figure to 6.9 to 8.8 Nm (0.7 to 0.9 kg-m, 61 to 78 inch lbs.). 18. Hang engine using the right and left side engine slingers with a suitable hoist. 19. Set a suitable transmission jack under the suspension member. 20. Remove right and left side engine mounting nuts. 21. Remove right and left side suspension member bolts. 22. Install aluminum oil pan. 23. Set ring gear stopper using the mounting bolt hole. - Be careful not to damage the signal plate teeth. 24. Install crankshaft pulley to crankshaft. - Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. 25. Install crankshaft pulley bolt. - Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. a. Tighten to 39 to 49 Nm (4.0 to 5.0 kg-m, 29 to 36 ft. lbs.). b. Put a paint mark on the crankshaft pulley. Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5790 EC-PGC/V-01 Page 4920 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air the greater the heat loss. Therefore the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 1373 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 414 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4503 Part 1 Page 4825 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2686 When draining all the coolant in the system, also perform the following two steps. 1. Open drain plugs on right side of cylinder block and water pump side, then open air relief plugs to drain coolant. 2. Check drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated flush engine cooling system, "Refer to FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM". Page 3783 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4658 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap oil level gauge etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. 4. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. 7. Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. Page 1651 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 3798 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4621 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine adjustment of the amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve changes the opening of the air by-pass passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actuated by a step motor built into the valve which moves the valve in the axial direction in steps corresponding to the ECM output signals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respective opening of the air by-pass passage. (i.e. when the step advances the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions such as during warm up deceleration and engine load (air conditioner power steering and cooling fan operation). COMPONENT DESCRIPTION IACV-AAC Valve The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and OFF two windings each in sequence. Each time the IACV-AAC valve opens or closes to change the auxiliary air quantity the ECM sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the auxiliary air quantity is needed the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening. Page 1403 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 110 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 5150 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5132 Description Part 1 Page 4332 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2124 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Wheel Bearing REAR WHEEL BEARING 1. Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. 2. Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) Page 5379 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3618 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3796 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3111 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2977 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1670 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 4802 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 4700 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2444 c. Again tighten by turning 60° to 66°, about the angle from one hexagon bolt head corner to another. 26. Install camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensors (REF)/(POS) and intake valve timing control position sensors. 27. Reinstall removed parts in the reverse order of removal. - When installing fuel tube and intake manifold collectors, refer to Engine; Service and Repair; Tightening Procedures. - After starting engine, keep idling for three minutes. Then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. Page 853 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5031 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Service and Repair Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair 4WD Model Electrical Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8* V *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 1585 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2598 Step 31 Page 4899 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5651 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1199 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 695 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4608 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4712 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1036 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 793 Description Part 1 Page 2418 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-IVCS-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVCS-L-01 Connector Views Page 655 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Description and Operation Sunload Sensor: Description and Operation Sunload Sensor Circuit COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The sunload sensor is located on the right defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is then input into the auto amplifier. SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS The auto amp. also includes a processing circuit which "average" the variations in detected sunload over a period of time. This prevents drastic swings in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in detected sunload. For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload detected by the sunload sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly. Page 5066 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4857 Part 7 Page 5273 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2285 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft, to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Thoroughly wipe off engine oil around adjusting shim using a rag. 3. Using a extra-fine screwdriver, turn the round hole of the adjusting shim in the direction of the arrow. 4. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See figure.), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 5. Rotate Tool (A) (See figure.) so that valve lifter is pushed down. 6. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: ^ Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. ^ Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 7. Remove Tool (A). Page 3187 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-POS-01 Page 667 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5688 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5420 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3260 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4340 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3472 Part 1 Page 169 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4335 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4254 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5241 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3682 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5739 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3952 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3417 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1737 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 3230 Step 8 - 10 Page 4016 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 3351 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 3429 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3822 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3808 EC-TP/SW-01 Page 1055 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4913 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3505 Type Of Standardized Relays Locations EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Harness Connector / Rear Left Tire / Spare Tire Page 3270 EC-FLS3-01 Page 5797 Description Part 1 Page 5486 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3552 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3430 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3001 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. Page 799 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2658 2 of 2 7. Check only those valves shown in the figure. ^ Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. ^ Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance for checking (Cold): Intake 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) 8. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 9. Set No. 3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 Locations Cruise Control Relay: Locations Component Locations Overall view Component View A Page 3847 EC-TPS-01 Connector Views Locations Alarm Horn Relay: Locations Components Locations Overall View Component View A Page 469 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Diagrams TIMING CHAIN Page 697 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3342 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4227 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3992 Step 21 - 22 Page 3487 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 895 Part 1 Page 4785 Page 3451 Consult-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode Page 1768 Step 14 - 18 Page 3845 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4147 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2195 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5742 EC-VSS-01 Connector Views Page 813 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3607 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2166 Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing CAUTION: - All applicable state or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. - It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage to the vehicle during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. - Always attach safety chains before towing. - When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. - Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. 2WD MODELS NISSAN recommends that vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground as illustrated. CAUTION: - When towing manual or automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. - When towing manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake and move the transmission shift lever to the N (neutral) position. Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Manual transmission models: - Speed: Below 95 km/h (59 MPH) - Distance: Less than 800 km (500 miles) Page 976 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4207 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2791 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4208 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2629 ^ It is not necessary to remove any coolant hoses or drain the coolant during ignition coil removal. 6. Replace the resistor assembly in all ignition coil tubes as follows: A. Pull the rubber boot away from the ignition coil. Then, twist and pull the ignition coil tube from the ignition coil to separate them (see Figure 7). B. Remove the old resistor assembly parts from the ignition coil tube and discard. Insert the new resistor assembly into the ignition coil tube in the order shown in Figure 8 shown. C. Assemble the ignition coil tube to the ignition coil. ^ Rotate the tube while pressing onto the coil. ^ A "pop" sound will be heard when the rubber boot is seated correctly to the ignition coil. Page 4636 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1419 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5726 Part 1 Page 5298 EC-PST/SW-01 Connector Views Page 1825 11. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open. 12. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 13. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 14. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. ^ If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. ^ If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace them. ^ If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 15. Install parts in reverse order of removal. 16. Perform "Self-diagnosis Procedure" if any DTC appears. Refer to Powertrain Management; Computers and Control Systems. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Page 5317 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4295 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4900 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3321 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4505 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2410 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5475 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 268 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5196 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 720 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4355 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-POS-01 Connector Views EC-REF-01 Connector Views Page 168 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2727 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4866 Part 6 Page 5453 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2165 Disclaimer Page 3889 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1417 Description Part 1 Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Gap (Nominal): .................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Spark plug Torque: ...................................................................................................................................... 19.6 - 29.4 Nm (2.0 - 2.9 kg-m, 15 - 22 ft. lbs.) Page 4753 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1805 ^ It is not necessary to remove any coolant hoses or drain the coolant during ignition coil removal. 6. Replace the resistor assembly in all ignition coil tubes as follows: A. Pull the rubber boot away from the ignition coil. Then, twist and pull the ignition coil tube from the ignition coil to separate them (see Figure 7). B. Remove the old resistor assembly parts from the ignition coil tube and discard. Insert the new resistor assembly into the ignition coil tube in the order shown in Figure 8 shown. C. Assemble the ignition coil tube to the ignition coil. ^ Rotate the tube while pressing onto the coil. ^ A "pop" sound will be heard when the rubber boot is seated correctly to the ignition coil. Page 3712 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3906 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4906 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1899 Coolant: Service and Repair Draining Engine Coolant Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Set air conditioning system as follows to prevent coolant from remaining in the system. a. Turn ignition switch "ON" and set temperature controller to maximum hot position. b. Wait 10 seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". 2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator. 3. Remove radiator filler cap. - Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. Page 3476 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1124 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Page 3836 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3135 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1043 EC-TPS-01 Connector Views Page 3182 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5312 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5693 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3500 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3673 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1134 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3703 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Carrier Gear Oil Front (4WD) ......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 1.5L (3 7/8 Pt) Rear ..................................................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 2.8L (5 7/8 Pt) Page 2396 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4204 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5503 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The vehicle speed sensor signal is sent from ABS actuator and electric unit to combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 200 Part 3 Page 4943 Part 1 Page 1437 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4455 Page 141 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 2589 Step 3 - 6 Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 632 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4527 Part 8 Page 3596 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1521 Part 1 Page 1887 Clutch Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks If fluid level is extremely low, check clutch system for leaks. Page 3057 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Engine Oil: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). GEAR OIL 75W-90 for transfer, and 80W-90 for differential are preferable. Page 4413 Electric Load Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3908 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 676 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 912 EC-O2S1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B2-01 Connector Views Page 4167 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 959 EC-PST/SW-01 Connector Views Page 560 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 2463 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2969 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5623 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment 1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly. 2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in "N" position. 3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible. 5. Reinstall any part removed. 6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Page 953 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1423 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4228 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1955 Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Oil Filter Change ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 5.0L Without Oil Filter Change .................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 4.8L Dry Engine (after engine overhaul) ...................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 6.8L Page 3062 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4130 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1586 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4605 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2804 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5434 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4396 EC-MIL/DL-01 Page 2155 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 4187 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 135 Locations Rear Window Defogger Relay Page 5111 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4982 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5223 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1084 EC-PNP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 5216 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4931 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4977 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 190 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1324 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 5525 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5412 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2044 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 2208 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5465 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Component Locations Overall view Component View D Page 5119 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 765 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 618 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 264 Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1683 The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center Page 5599 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5516 Type Of Standardized Relays Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Secondary Suppression Resistor: Customer Interest Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Classification: EL02-007 Reference: NTB02-040 Date: April 12, 2002 2002 PATHFINDER STATIC RADIO NOISE CAUSED BY IGNITION COILS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before: JN8DR09X*2W655078 JN8DR09Y*2W713864 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: October 22, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If the radio of an Applied Vehicle exhibits the following symptom: ^ A steady, rhythmic static noise heard from the speakers that "follows" engine speed on certain FM radio stations, The cause may be the ignition coil resistors. A new resistor assembly (located inside the ignition coil tube) is available to repair the described symptom, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 2. Turn radio on and search for several FM stations until a steady "ticking" or "popping" noise is heard through the speakers. Notes: ^ Weaker radio stations may make the static noise easier to detect, if it exists. ^ Increasing the treble and decreasing the bass settings may also make the "ticking" noise easier to detect, if it exists. 3. If the incident is duplicated, accelerate the engine and note if the frequency of the "ticking" or "popping" noise increases with engine speed. 4. If the noise does not "follow" the engine speed, the incident is not caused by the ignition coils. Consult the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) to diagnose and repair the incident. 5. If the noise "follows" the engine speed, remove all ignition coils from the engine using the following procedure: Page 5766 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 404 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 376 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4371 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1279 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 137 Attachment General Procedure Page 4027 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 1150 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5051 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1695 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. Page 3701 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1120 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3724 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4907 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1284 EC-FTTS-01 Connector Views Page 4615 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3874 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2411 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5519 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5053 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1647 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 1023 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1267 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 256 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3838 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 891 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1216 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1241 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1004 EC-TP/SW-01 Page 4436 Step 4 - 7 Page 1086 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position (PNP) switch is "ON". ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the "ON" signal) exists. For All models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. Page 5437 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5496 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5633 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5569 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5370 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5607 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 166 Description Part 1 Page 3777 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4458 Page 1383 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 432 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 170 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4502 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2414 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1537 EC-PST/SW-01 Connector Views Page 2515 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4561 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1344 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5440 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 213 Part 6 Page 4342 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2469 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4259 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1580 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5526 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3641 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1663 Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 3955 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5451 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4617 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5557 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3696 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1246 EC-MAFS-01 Page 2513 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4205 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5432 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3126 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5363 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4989 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2432 10. Remove the power steering oil pump and reservoir tank. Tie them down using rope or the like to keep them from interfering. 11. Remove alternator. 12. Remove the following. - Vacuum gallery - Water bypass pipe - Brackets 1 of 2 2 of 2 13. Remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE), intake valve timing control position sensors and crankshaft position sensor (REF). - Avoid impact such as dropping. - Do not disassemble the components. - Do not place them on areas where iron powder may adhere. - Keep away from the objects susceptible to magnetism. 14. Remove upper intake manifold collector in reverse order of installation. 15. Remove intake manifold collector support bolts. Page 4745 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5777 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2584 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED - Using CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. Page 5510 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 666 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Oil Filter / Crankshaft Pulley / Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Harness Connector Oil Pan / Crankshaft Position Sensor Harness Connector Page 1224 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4959 EC-PHASE-01 Connector Views Page 370 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2482 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4253 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4721 EC-O2S1B1-01 Page 1024 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2079 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 3225 EC-LOAD-01 Connector Views Page 2280 2.92 mm 292 2.93 mm 293 2.94 mm 294 2.95 mm 295 Page 4692 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3502 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The absolute pressure sensor is built into ECM. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the microcomputer. Page 5142 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3839 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5060 Electric Load Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2552 Step 32 - 33 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 728 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1285 EC-FTTS-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4847 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2339 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type API Grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II API Grade SJ, Energy Conserving ILSAC Grade GF-I & GF-II Page 849 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1455 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Locations Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] 470 - 570 Ohm Page 3121 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1343 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3899 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 5374 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4681 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4310 EC-S/SIG-01 Connector Views Page 952 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3275 Front Bumper LH Side / Intake Air Temperature Sensor Harness Connector Page 4018 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 2460 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5069 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4892 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2154 Page 3593 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2854 Page 357 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3029 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g.m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g.m/sec at 2,500 rpm* *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 3405 EC-O2S2B2-01 Page 1184 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3925 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 202 Part 5 Page 692 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5814 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5529 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4741 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4577 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-FLS1-01 Page 1045 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation P0121, P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Description COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the throttle position into output voltage and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the ECM. Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sensor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand the "Wide open and closed throttle position switch" which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control. P0510 CTP SENSOR Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 2401 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5201 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3963 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5229 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 363 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3873 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 212 Part 5 Page 1219 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 977 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2201 Part 1 Page 1675 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 1833 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses, wires, harnesses, connectors and so on. 3. Remove intake manifold collectors. 4. Remove ignition coils and spark plugs. 5. Remove RH and LH rocker covers. 6. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. ^ Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. ^ Check that valve lifters on No. 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No. 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 1 of 2 Page 1061 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4783 Page 4456 Page 2986 Part 5 Page 3056 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5352 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 562 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5249 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Specifications TIMING CHAIN Page 2639 ^ Ensure there are no gaps and bulges between the coil body and the rubber boot (see Figure 9). 7. Install the repaired ignition coils (with the new resistor assembly) to the engine. CAUTION: When re-installing the ignition coils, make sure that the coils are correctly connected to the engine harness. 8. Re-install all other parts removed in reverse order. NOTE: Install a new throttle chamber gasket when re-installing parts (see PARTS INFORMATION section for further information). 9. Check to ensure the incident has been resolved by repeating steps 1 and 2. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 4245 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4492 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Specifications Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760 Ohm MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550 Ohm Page 755 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1536 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4467 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 2967 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3367 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Testing and Inspection Fan Switch Page 4211 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4501 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3434 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4843 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio Coolant: Service and Repair Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine Nissan anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/ distilled water. Other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system. Page 942 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2801 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1463 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5452 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2881 Page 2528 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVC-R-01 Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 2251 Connecting Rod: Specifications Center distance 144.15 - 144.25 mm Bend [per 100 mm] Limit 0.15 mm Torsion [per 100 mm] Limit 0.30 mm Connecting rod small end inner diameter 23.980 - 24.000 mm Piston pin bushing inner diameter Grade No. 0 22.000 - 22.006 mm After installing in connecting rod Grade No. 1 22.006 - 22.012 mm Connecting rod big end inner diameter 55.000 - 55.013 mm Side clearance Standard 0.20 - 0.35 mm Limit 0.40 mm Page 1359 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2879 Page 4139 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3416 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5493 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5367 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3461 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2500 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4244 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4958 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2464 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4249 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4657 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3795 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 938 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4184 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3674 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3723 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1590 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1847 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Page 2440 6. Install secondary timing chain and sprocket to the other bank. Install primary timing chain at the same time. - Installation of the secondary timing chain follows the procedure described in step 5. - Install primary timing chain so that mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with that (dark blue link) on the timing chain, and mating mark (notched) on crankshaft sprocket is aligned with that on the timing chain, respectively. - When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft hexagonal head using a spanner so it is aligned with the mating mark. - During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating marks on the secondary timing chain. 7. After confirming the mating marks are aligned, tighten the camshaft sprocket mounting bolts. - Secure the camshaft hexagonal head using a spanner to tighten mounting bolts. 8. Pull out the stopper pin from the secondary timing chain tensioner. Page 1697 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. Page 4124 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3597 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1628 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. Page 1572 Part 1 Part 2 Description and Operation Ignition Coil And Power Transistor Page 5058 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3362 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1756 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 5120 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2550 Step 28 - 30 Page 4260 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2898 CAUTION: Wear suitable protective gloves (latex/nitril) and a face shield/goggles when handling the Exhaust Sealant. You may get a rash if it gets on your skin. Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shown for more information. Page 3444 EC-PST/SW-01 Connector Views Page 4607 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5787 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions Hose: Testing and Inspection Checking EVAP Vapor Lines 1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. 2. Inspect vacuum relief valve of fuel tank filler cap for clogging, sticking, etc. Refer to "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM". Page 1083 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5455 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2134 1. Remove brake caliper assembly. Brake hose need not be disconnected from brake caliper. In this case, suspend caliper assembly with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. Be careful not to depress brake pedal, or piston will pop out. Make sure brake hose is not twisted. 2. Remove hub cap with suitable tool. 3. Remove snap ring with suitable tool. -4WD- 4. Remove drive flange. -4WD5. Remove lock washer. Page 4622 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 2922 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 1332 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 138 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 1029 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4482 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 1522 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3365 Description Part 1 Page 4480 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 5700 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1831 2.92 mm 292 2.93 mm 293 2.94 mm 294 2.95 mm 295 Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Secondary Suppression Resistor: Customer Interest Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Classification: EL02-007 Reference: NTB02-040 Date: April 12, 2002 2002 PATHFINDER STATIC RADIO NOISE CAUSED BY IGNITION COILS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before: JN8DR09X*2W655078 JN8DR09Y*2W713864 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: October 22, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If the radio of an Applied Vehicle exhibits the following symptom: ^ A steady, rhythmic static noise heard from the speakers that "follows" engine speed on certain FM radio stations, The cause may be the ignition coil resistors. A new resistor assembly (located inside the ignition coil tube) is available to repair the described symptom, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 2. Turn radio on and search for several FM stations until a steady "ticking" or "popping" noise is heard through the speakers. Notes: ^ Weaker radio stations may make the static noise easier to detect, if it exists. ^ Increasing the treble and decreasing the bass settings may also make the "ticking" noise easier to detect, if it exists. 3. If the incident is duplicated, accelerate the engine and note if the frequency of the "ticking" or "popping" noise increases with engine speed. 4. If the noise does not "follow" the engine speed, the incident is not caused by the ignition coils. Consult the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) to diagnose and repair the incident. 5. If the noise "follows" the engine speed, remove all ignition coils from the engine using the following procedure: Page 3871 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1957 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Changing Engine Oil WARNING: - Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. - Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 2. Stop engine and wait for more than 10 minutes. 3. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap. 4. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil. Oil specification and viscosity API grade SG or SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving - API Certification Mark - ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II - See "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug: Tightening Torque: 29 - 39 N.m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) - The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 5. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 6. Stop engine and wait for more than 10 minutes. 7. Check oil level. Page 3290 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 718 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5197 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2934 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 5439 Type Of Standardized Relays Locations Engine Mount: Locations ENGINE ASSEMBLY Front Engine Mounting Rear Engine Mounting All-mode 4WD - 2WD A/T Page 372 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4792 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Front Wheel Bearing Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Wheel Bearing FRONT WHEEL BEARING 1. Check that wheel bearings operate smoothly. 2. Check axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) 3. Adjust wheel bearing preload if there is any axial end play or wheel bearing does not turn smoothly. Preload Adjustment Adjust wheel bearing preread after wheel bearing has been replaced or front axle has been reassembled. Adjust wheel bearing preload as follows: 1. Before adjustment, thoroughly clean all parts to prevent dirt entry. 2. Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts: - Threaded portion of spindle - Contact surface between wheel bearing lock washer (chamfered side) and outer wheel bearing - Grease seal lip - Wheel hub (as shown at left)-4WD3. Tighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool. 78 - 98 Nm (8 -10 kg.m, 58 - 72 ft. lbs.) 4. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. 5. Loosen wheel bearing lock nut so that torque becomes 0 Nm (0 kg.m, 0 ft. lbs.). 6. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool. 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (0.05 - 0.15 kg.m, 4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) 7. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3116 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2756 Radiator: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION Apply pressure with Tool. Specified pressure value: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. Attach a hose to the oil cooler as well. Page 4307 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4813 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3509 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4890 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3226 EC-LOAD-01 Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The absolute pressure sensor is built into ECM. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the microcomputer. Page 3244 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4163 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3250 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 488 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2387 Description Part 1 Page 1433 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1054 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 919 EC-O2S2B1-01 Page 5220 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3630 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5522 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 874 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 5050 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5095 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4612 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1182 Part 1 Part 2 Page 193 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5294 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 941 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2472 Part 1 Page 3527 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2892 b. If either Front Tube looks like the one shown in Figure 3 (with a silver colored heat shield): ^ It is the new-style Front Tube. ^ Do NOT apply the repair kit on this type of Front Tube. NOTE: The vehicle you're working on may have both the new and the old Front Tubes. The Repair Kit should be used on the old-style Front Tube ONLY. 2. Repair the Front Tube(s) by installing Front Tube Repair Kit # 20711-5W90A as follows. ^ Remember NOT to repair a new-style Front Tube with the silver colored heat shield. NOTE: Perform this repair with the Front Tubes in the vehicle. Do NOT remove the Front Tubes. Page 4659 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4432 EC-LOAD-01 Connector Views Page 5158 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3338 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4855 Part 5 Page 2711 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3284 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3329 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1101 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Available Valve Shims Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve shim Thickness Identification mark 2.32 mm 232 2.33 mm 233 2.34 mm 234 2.35 mm 235 2.36 mm 236 2.37 mm 237 2.38 mm 238 2.39 mm 239 2.40 mm 240 2.41 mm 241 2.42 mm 242 2.43 mm 243 2.44 mm 244 2.45 mm 245 2.46 mm 246 2.47 mm 247 2.48 mm 248 2.49 mm 249 2.50 mm 250 2.51 mm 251 2.52 mm 252 2.53 mm 253 2.54 mm 254 2.55 mm 255 2.56 mm 256 2.57 mm 257 2.58 mm 258 2.59 mm 259 Page 4579 EC-FLS3-01 Page 4811 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 496 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Seat Memory Switch Page 4862 Part 2 Page 5715 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2926 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based on the resistance of the thermal transmitter. As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable ground is supplied to terminal 18 of the combination meter for the water temperature gauge. The needle on the gauge moves from "C" to "H". Page 4165 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5840 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1356 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4499 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3951 Type Of Standardized Relays Fluid Level Inspection Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Fluid Level Inspection CHECKING FLUID LEVEL - Check fluid level with engine off. - Check fluid level with dipstick on reservoir cap. Use "HOT" range at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Use "COLD" range at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). CAUTION: - Do not overfill. - Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent. Refer to "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Page 3184 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4978 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 545 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4460 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 5281 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4469 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 4660 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2518 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5169 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1025 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4380 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3371 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5813 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4451 Specifications Valve: Specifications Valve, intake/exhaust Valve head diameter "D" Intake 37.0 - 37.3 mm Exhaust 31.2 - 31.5 mm Valve length "L" Intake 96.12 - 96.62 mm Exhaust 93.65 - 94.15 mm Valve stem diameter "d" Intake 5.965 - 5.980 mm Exhaust 5.945 - 5.960 mm Valve seat angle "a" Intake 45 deg 15' - 45 deg 45' Exhaust Valve margin "T" Intake 1.15 - 1.45 mm Exhaust 1.45 - 1.75 mm Valve margin "T" limit More than 0.5 mm Valve stem end surface grinding limit Less than 0.2 mm Page 1424 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 267 Part 1 Page 2203 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5714 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4564 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4575 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2988 Part 7 Page 4954 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 773 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4930 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3753 Part 1 Page 5450 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1903 Coolant: Service and Repair Flushing Cooling System 1. Open air relief plug. 2. Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief holes, then close air relief plugs. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap. 3. Run engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Rev engine two or three times under no-load. 5. Stop engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain water. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. Page 3609 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 4737 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 1258 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1721 Step 14 - 18 Page 4409 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4563 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 130 Page 4038 Step 19 - 20 Page 2300 Valve Seat: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Head Assembly; Service and Repair. Page 5680 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 688 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5740 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4965 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4212 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2915 Page 5716 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4229 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4656 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4255 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4100 2.92 mm 292 2.93 mm 293 2.94 mm 294 2.95 mm 295 Page 157 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2542 Step 3 - 6 Page 3764 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1820 Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling may occur with the standard type spark plug such as: - frequent engine starts - low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock may occur with the standard type spark plug such as: extended highway driving - frequent high engine revolution - Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/sq.cm, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Page 5325 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5405 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4516 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3337 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1476 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2911 Page 131 Page 3104 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3308 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1363 EC-TPS-01 Page 1119 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5123 EC-FLS2-01 Page 2811 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3541 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Locations Impact Sensor: Locations Overall View Component View F Page 4506 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1486 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 127 Page 4151 EC-MAFS-01 Connector Views Page 5094 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5254 EC-O2H2B1-01 Page 2398 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2952 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3658 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 575 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4917 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1554 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering components, suspension components, and tires, or after adjusting wheel alignment, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. CAUTION: To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-II. (Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.) 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "CONTROL MODULE INPUT ITEM", and "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" is within 0 ± 3.5 degrees. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 3494 Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 2395 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2287 11. Install new shim using a suitable tool. ^ Install with the surface on which the thickness is stamped facing down. 12. Place Tool (A) as mentioned in steps 2 and 3. 13. Remove Tool (B). 14. Remove Tool (A). 15. Recheck valve clearance. Valve clearance Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 5011 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1725 Step 25 - 27 Page 3175 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2755 Page 4547 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3045 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 192 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Testing and Inspection Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering components, suspension components, and tires, or after adjusting wheel alignment, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. CAUTION: To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-II. (Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.) 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "CONTROL MODULE INPUT ITEM", and "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" is within 0 ± 3.5 degrees. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 2834 Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat, engine cooling Water control valve Valve opening temperature 95 deg C Valve lift More than 8.0 mm/108 deg C Valve closing temperature 5 deg C below valve opening temperature Page 3375 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3746 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2546 Step 19 - 20 Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85 V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 V Page 564 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5341 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1631 Steering rack sliding force that is above specification will affect the vehicle's ability to return to the straight ahead position after a turn. 5. Reassemble the vehicle. 6. Test drive and ensure the steering wheel returns to the straight ahead position after making right and left turns. Page 2729 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4121 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Main journal dia. "Dm" grade Grade No.A 59.975 - 59.974 mm Grade No B 59.974 - 59.973 mm Grade No.C 59.973 - 59.972 mm Grade No.D 59.972 - 59.971 mm Grade No.E 59.971 - 59.970 mm Grade No.F 59.970 - 59.969 mm Grade No.G 59.969 - 59.968 mm Grade No.H 59.968 - 59.967 mm Grade No.J 59.967 - 59.966 mm Grade No.K 59.966 - 59.965 mm Grade No.L 59.965 - 59.964 mm Grade No.M 59.964 - 59.963 mm Grade No.N 59.963 - 59.962 mm Grade No.P 59.962 - 59.961 mm Grade No.R 59.961 - 59.960 mm Grade No.S 59.960 - 59.959 mm Grade No.T 59.959 - 59.958 mm Grade No.U 59.958 - 59.957 mm Grade No.V 59.957 - 59.956 mm Grade No.W 59.956 - 59.955 mm Grade No.X 59.955 - 59.954 mm Grade No.Y 59.954 - 59.953 mm Grade No.4 59.953 - 59.952 mm Grade No.7 59.952 - 59.951 mm Pin journal dia. "Dp" Grade No. 0 51.968 - 51.974 mm Grade No. 1 51.962 - 51.968 mm Grade No. 2 51.956 - 51.962 mm Center distance "Y" 40.36 - 40.44 mm Out-of-round (X - Y) Less than 0.002 mm Page 494 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4789 Page 4125 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3953 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 659 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1519 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 713 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3361 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 RH Harness Connector / Engine Front Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Left Bank) / Transmission / Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Right Bank) Page 4508 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Description and Operation Ignition Coil And Power Transistor Page 3905 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4675 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 5382 EC-TPS-01 Connector Views Page 4221 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3948 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 377 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5335 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3920 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5333 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5819 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3408 Special/Commercial Service Tools Page 1448 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Connector Views EC-POS-01 Connector Views EC-REF-01 Connector Views Page 4580 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 1506 Description Part 1 Page 5800 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3636 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4821 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5292 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4727 Special/Commercial Service Tools Page 2524 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Locations Component View A Page 5025 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3616 Description Part 1 Page 3743 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4366 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2984 Part 3 Page 1680 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 3376 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5287 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3381 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1348 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 195 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5491 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3262 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 911 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views EC-O2H1B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S1B1-01 Connector Views Page 4941 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1973 1. A/C switch ON. 2. Face mode 3. Recirculation switch ON 4. Max cold temperature 5. Fan speed high 9. Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 10. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping the engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when pressure is high. 11. Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover refrigerant from equipment lines and then check refrigerant purity. 12. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. 14. Discharge A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 15. Evacuate and recharge A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm no refrigerant leaks. 16. Conduct A/C performance test to ensure system works properly. Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector PRECAUTIONS FOR FLUORESCENT DYE LEAK DETECTION - The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to pinpoint refrigerant leaks. - For your safety and your customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturers operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the work. - Refer to "Precautions for Leak Detection Dye". CHECKING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS USING THE FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTOR 1. Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety glasses (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or TXV) leak. 2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then check the cloth with the UV lamp for dye residue. 3. Confirm any suspected leaks with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. 4. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. 5. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant leak detector. DYE INJECTION (This procedure is only necessary when re-charging the system or when the compressor has seized and was replaced.) Refer to "Precautions for Leak Detection Dye". 1. Check A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459). 3. Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW PRESSURE side service fitting. 4. Start engine and switch A/C ON. 5. With the A/C operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool J-41459 (refer to the manufacturers operating instructions). 6. With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the service fitting. CAUTION: Be careful not to allow dye to spray or drip when disconnecting the injector from the system. Page 2405 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1214 Description Part 1 Page 1041 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2135 6. Remove wheel bearing lock nut. 7. Remove wheel hub and wheel bearing. Be careful not to drop outer bearing. INSTALLATION 1. After installing wheel hub and wheel bearing, adjust wheel bearing preload. 2. Pack drive flange groove with grease, apply grease to O-ring (two places) and mating surface of drive flange, and install flange. -4WD- 3. Install snap ring. -4WD4. Install hub cap using a suitable tool. Do not reuse hub cap. When installing, replace it with a new one. DISASSEMBLY Page 1342 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5299 EC-PST/SW-01 Page 3171 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4755 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1421 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2504 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5236 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4084 ^ Ensure there are no gaps and bulges between the coil body and the rubber boot (see Figure 9). 7. Install the repaired ignition coils (with the new resistor assembly) to the engine. CAUTION: When re-installing the ignition coils, make sure that the coils are correctly connected to the engine harness. 8. Re-install all other parts removed in reverse order. NOTE: Install a new throttle chamber gasket when re-installing parts (see PARTS INFORMATION section for further information). 9. Check to ensure the incident has been resolved by repeating steps 1 and 2. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding as shown. Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2939 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 880 Description Part 1 Page 551 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 197 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 1481 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5048 Description Part 1 Page 3789 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1484 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3065 EC-MAFS-01 Page 4796 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference value Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference value Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value INSPECTION OF AUTO AMP. - Measure voltage between each terminal and body ground by following "AUTO AMP. INSPECTION TABLE". - Pin connector terminal layout AUTO AMP. INSPECTION TABLE Page 258 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1147 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5531 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4500 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5093 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3254 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4973 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting rod bearing clearance Standard 0.034 - 0.059 mm Limit 0.070 mm Page 5267 Description Part 1 Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2713 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 768 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3949 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3993 Step 23 - 24 Page 4742 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3631 Part 1 Page 2011 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Position Switch Check Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3959 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4261 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5221 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4475 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 2908 Page 932 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2392 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5255 EC-O2H2B2-01 Page 3671 Part 1 Page 3656 Description Part 1 Page 5678 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5135 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3880 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4702 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3041 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4345 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5116 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2101 4. Resurface both front rotors using an On-Car Brake Lathe. IMPORTANT NOTES: ^ An on-car brake lathe (such as the ProCut(TM) PFM9.0 or equivalent) is a required essential tool and must be used to perform warranty brake rotor surfacing. ^ The ProCut(TM) PFM9.0 can be ordered from TECH-MATE at 1-800-662-2001. ^ The on-car brake lathe is more effective in reducing brake rotor run out than the conventional off-car lathe method. ^ When using the on-car brake lathe, prevent metal shavings from contacting or collecting on the ABS speed sensors. ^ Remove any shavings that stick to the ABS speed sensor's magnet. It is best to clean the ABS sensor with the rotor removed. ^ If the rotor must be removed for any reason, mark the exact location (rotor to axle hub) before removing the rotor (see Figure 6). This will make sure you reinstall the rotor back to the same location. ^ Do not tighten the wheel lug nuts with an air impact driver. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to the proper torque specification. Uneven or high torque applied to the lugs may distort the brake rotor and hub. This may result in increased rotor runout and excessive rotor thickness variation as the rotor wears. 5. After the rotors have been resurfaced: ^ Recheck the rotor thickness. Specification: 26.0 mm (1.024 in.) minimum thickness. ^ Check the rotor runout. Specification: 0.03 mm (0.001 in) maximum runout. NOTE: Runout specification is new, and is slightly less than what is shown in the ESM. Page 4549 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3784 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4779 Page 2120 Wheel Bearing: Specifications Rear WHEEL BEARING (REAR) Wheel Bearing Axial End Play ............................................................................................................. ...................................................... 0 mm (0 inch) Wheel Bearing Lock Nut Tightening Torque .......................................................................................................................................................... 245 - 314 Nm (25 - 32 kg.m, 181 - 231 ft. lbs.) Wheel Bearing Preload Measured At Bearing Cage Bolt .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... 6.9 - 48.1 N (0.7 - 4.9 kg, 1.5 - 10.8 lbs.) Page 1674 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 1114 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4032 Overall Inspection Sequence Page 3440 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4426 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3501 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4531 Part 2 Page 1770 Step 21 - 22 Page 1401 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5178 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3910 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 776 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3866 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1691 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1378 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Thermostat Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat, engine cooling Thermostat Valve opening temperature 76.5 deg C Valve lift More than 8.6 mm/90 deg C Valve closing temperature 5 deg C below valve opening temperature Page 1707 1. Set wheels in straight-ahead position. Then move vehicle forward until front wheels rest on turning radius gauge properly. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure turning angle. Do not hold the steering wheel on full lock for more than 15 seconds. Wheel turning angle (Full turn). Page 4644 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 371 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1335 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5641 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1488 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4102 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses, wires, harnesses, connectors and so on. 3. Remove intake manifold collectors. 4. Remove ignition coils and spark plugs. 5. Remove RH and LH rocker covers. 6. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. ^ Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. ^ Check that valve lifters on No. 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No. 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 1 of 2 Page 898 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2491 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Page 132 Page 4507 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement Revolution Sensor Replacement -4WD MODEL1. Remove rear engine mounting member from side member while supporting A/T with transfer case with jack. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. 2. Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. - Always use new sealing parts. -2WD MODEL- Remove revolution sensor from A/T. - Always use new sealing parts. Page 578 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 436 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 737 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3785 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1193 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 474 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 885 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4898 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2530 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation IVT CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake valve. The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position camshaft position engine speed and engine coolant temperature. Then the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the camshaft timing control valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range. IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Page 3324 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3336 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5061 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3921 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1523 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3435 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5257 EC-O2S1B2-01 Page 3595 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4149 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1305 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2808 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5360 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5681 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Locations Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations Throttle Body / EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve Page 5613 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4986 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Locations Rear Window Defogger Switch Page 4391 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2541 Step 1 - 2 Page 684 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5138 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Page 5329 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The absolute pressure sensor is built into ECM. The sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the microcomputer. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 866 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 158 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 3165 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 549 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4144 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3201 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5246 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2473 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1323 EC-TP/SW-01 Page 4354 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3923 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Locations EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Harness Connector / Rear Left Tire / Spare Tire Page 3398 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-O2H1B1-01 Page 471 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1682 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. Page 2916 Page 5009 Description Part 1 Page 5253 EC-O2H1B2-01 Page 3704 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4290 Part 1 Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1116 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2704 Description Part 1 Page 972 Description Part 1 Page 4759 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4981 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Page 3082 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5580 EC-TPS-01 Page 4357 EC-REF-01 Page 2314 Page 3803 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1268 Part 1 Page 4781 Page 3790 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2936 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2656 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve slearance Intake Cold 0.26 - 0.34 mm Hot (reference data) 0.304 - 0.416 mm Approximately 80 deg C Exhaust Cold 0.29 - 0.37 mm Hot (reference data) 0.308 - 0.432 mm Page 5422 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 767 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2132 Wheel Hub: Diagrams Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc COMPONENTS 2WD Model 4WD Model Page 635 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5442 Part 1 Part 2 Page 125 Page 2816 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4661 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1595 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment 1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly. 2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in "N" position. 3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible. 5. Reinstall any part removed. 6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Page 1121 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2527 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Views EC-IVC-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVC-L-01 Connector Views Page 2717 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5644 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 554 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 179 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2126 Wheel Bearing: Tools and Equipment Pin Wrench Socket AST tool# D 502 - Made in the U.S.A. Needed for adjusting front wheel bearings. Applicable for 4 wheel Nissan pickup and Pathfinder 1986 1/2-2004. It will not fit 05-06 Nissans with a non-serviceable wheel bearing. retail price: $81.79 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Page 204 Part 7 Page 3071 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 703 EC-REF-01 Page 3710 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4072 A. Remove the engine decorative cover (see Figure 1) B. Remove four 10 mm head screws (two rear, two front) which hold the harness to the intake collector on the passenger side (see Figure 2). C. Remove the intake air duct (see Figure 3). Page 1974 NOTE: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the dye to penetrate a leak and become visible. Page 2294 Valve Guide: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Head Assembly; Service and Repair. Page 472 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3285 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3667 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5639 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2648 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove engine cover and throttle wire. 5. Remove air duct with air cleaner case. 6. Remove harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coils. 7. Remove throttle body. Left bank Right bank 8. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connectors, then remove ignition coils. 9. Remove all spark plugs. ^ Clean area around plug with compressed air before removing the spark plug. 1 of 2 2 of 2 10. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. Page 4524 Part 5 Page 4423 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4747 Part 1 Page 5407 Part 1 Page 253 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2794 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 201 Part 4 Page 5555 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4995 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1527 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4550 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 152 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4589 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5356 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Locations Lock Cylinder Switch: Locations Front Door Key Cylinder Switch/Front Door Lock Actuator Back Door Key Cylinder Switch/Back Door Lock Actuator Components Locations Overall View Page 1485 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1231 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2580 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 804 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5269 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1402 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 456 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection COMPONENT INSPECTION In-vehicle Sensor After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor harness connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table above. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor. Page 5305 Consult-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode Page 4417 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1347 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3540 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4801 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4884 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 2863 2WD Model Removal and Installation CAUTION: - Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. - With engine running, check all tube connections for exhaust gas leaks, and entire system for unusual noises. - Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise or vibration. - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Page 616 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3100 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4382 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1311 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2489 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Page 996 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2206 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1757 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 5498 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3259 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 883 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1848 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Checking Drive Belts 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear and oil. If necessary, replace. 2. Inspect drive belt deflection or tension at a point on the belt midway between pulleys. 3. Check belt tension using belt tension gauge (BT3373-F or equivalent). Belt Deflection And Tension Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. Page 5073 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2484 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1202 EC-PRE/SE-01 Connector Views Page 875 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater Resistance [at 25 deg C (77 deg F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Resistance [at 25 °C (77 °F)] 2.3 - 4.3 Ohm Page 4075 ^ Ensure there are no gaps and bulges between the coil body and the rubber boot (see Figure 9). 7. Install the repaired ignition coils (with the new resistor assembly) to the engine. CAUTION: When re-installing the ignition coils, make sure that the coils are correctly connected to the engine harness. 8. Re-install all other parts removed in reverse order. NOTE: Install a new throttle chamber gasket when re-installing parts (see PARTS INFORMATION section for further information). 9. Check to ensure the incident has been resolved by repeating steps 1 and 2. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding as shown. Page 5125 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 651 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5270 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 379 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3832 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Electrical Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8* V *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 2931 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 729 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 1524 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5068 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2914 Page 3094 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Specifications Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760 Ohm MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550 Ohm Page 5161 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5303 Step 4 - 6 Page 2436 - Remove timing chain tensioner. (Push piston and insert a suitable pin into pinhole.) 33. Attach a suitable stopper pin to RH and LH camshaft chain tensioners. 34. Remove intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket bolts. - Apply paint to timing chain and camshaft sprockets for alignment during installation. - Secure the hexagonal head of the camshaft using a spanner to loosen mounting bolts. 35. Remove primary and secondary timing chains along with the camshaft sprockets. - Do not disassemble the intake camshaft sprocket. - Avoid damaging the signal mark protrusion area at the front of the left bank intake camshaft sprocket. Keep it away from magnetized objects. Page 3848 EC-TPS-01 Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap oil level gauge etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. 4. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. 7. Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. Page 5770 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 931 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4689 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1803 A. Remove the engine decorative cover (see Figure 1) B. Remove four 10 mm head screws (two rear, two front) which hold the harness to the intake collector on the passenger side (see Figure 2). C. Remove the intake air duct (see Figure 3). Page 580 EC-MAFS-01 Page 5436 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5789 EC-PGC/V-01 Connector Views Page 5535 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5690 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5743 EC-VSS-01 Page 2085 Disclaimer Page 4949 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1948 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications When changing transfer case fluid completely, A/T fluid may be used. Fluid grade: Nissan Matic "D" (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid or API GL-4 Outside Temperature Range Anticipated Before Next Oil Change Below 50°F (10°C) ............................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 75W Below 86°F (30°C) ............................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 80W Below 104°F (40°C) ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 75W-90, 80W-90 Between 14°F (-10°C) and 86°F (30°C) .............................................................................................. ........................................................................... 85W Between 32°F (0°C) and 104°F (40°C) ............................................................................................... ........................................................................... 90W Above 50°F (10°C) .............................................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 140W 75W-90 for transfer case, and 80W-90 for differential are preferable if the ambient temperature is below 40° C (104° F). Electrical Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8* V *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 1003 EC-TP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 3218 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2997 Part 6 Page 822 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 124 Page 2419 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Page 3610 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 3475 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 631 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3450 Step 7 - 8 Page 2941 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 5321 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1918 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing Part Time Changing Part Time 4WD Transfer Fluid When changing transfer fluid completely, A/T fluid may be used. Fluid grade: Nissan Matic "D" (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid or API. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants", "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". Fluid capacity: 2.2 l (2-3/8 US qt, 2 Imp qt) Drain plug: Tightening Torque: 25 - 34 N-m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18-25 ft-lb) Page 5488 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5148 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 187 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations ECM / ECM Harness Connector Overall View Component View D Page 5722 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2407 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3288 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4346 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2002 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 2109 1. Remove both front brake caliper assemblies. ^ Refer the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), section BR for brake caliper assembly removal. 2. Check axial end play. ^ Specification: 0 mm (0 in.) ^ Refer to the Service Manual (ESM), section AX, for axial end play inspection and adjustment. 3. Inspect the rotors to confirm they are serviceable (they can be reused/resurfacing is possible). ^ Refer to the ESM, section BR, for rotor inspection ^ Minimum Thickness: 26.0 mm (1.024 in.) IMPORTANT: If new rotors are required, "index" them to the hub (see "Rotor Indexing"). Turn the front rotors Page 1896 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant type Genuine Nissan anti-coolant or equivalent Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 Page 1063 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3757 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2721 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2437 36. Remove lower chain guide. 37. Remove crankshaft sprocket. 38. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from front timing chain case. - Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt hole and thread. 39. Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from intake valve timing control valve cover. Inspection Check for cracks and excessive wear at roller links. Replace chain if necessary. Page 1273 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 964 Step 4 - 6 Page 2772 ^ Install a new radiator cap. Page 3926 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 614 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4604 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Page 3305 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4288 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5122 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-FLS1-01 Page 4743 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1334 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4315 Consult-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode Page 5203 EC-KS-01 Connector Views Page 3499 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1394 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2814 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 144 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Brakes - Front Brake Vibration/Pulsation/Judder Wheel Bearing: Customer Interest Brakes - Front Brake Vibration/Pulsation/Judder Classification: BR03-002 Reference: NTB03-091 Date: October 8, 2003 2001-2003 PATHFINDER; BRAKE JUDDER FROM FRONT BRAKES APPLIED VEHICLE: 2001 - 2003 Pathfinder (R50) IF YOU CONFIRM: While braking, a steering wheel shake, body vibration, or brake pedal pulsation (also known as "brake judder"), especially during high speed braking. ACTIONS: ^ Check front wheel bearing axial end play. ^ "Turn" the front brake rotors using an On-Car Brake Lathe. ^ Install the new front brake pads and hardware kit (see Parts Information). ^ Burnish the brake pads. NOTE: Brake judder repair, as outlined in this bulletin, is covered by the 3 year, 36,000 mile warranty for Applied Vehicles. PARTS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line using the claims coding table. SERVICE PROCEDURE Check front wheel axial play Page 2840 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Water Control Valve - Secondary Thermostat INSPECTION 1. Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly. 2. Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift. 3. Then check if valve closes at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. Page 903 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1163 EC-VSS-01 Page 5403 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3648 EC-VSS-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2010 Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Fuse And Fusible Link Box Page 4216 Part 1 Page 5300 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Component Description The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 3885 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1400 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2798 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2919 Page 5026 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4526 Part 7 Page 1690 ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 989 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5662 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3174 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1255 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3843 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 558 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1931 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................................................................. API GL-4 SAE 75W-90 Page 2809 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1122 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5665 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 1824 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove engine cover and throttle wire. 5. Remove air duct with air cleaner case. 6. Remove harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coils. 7. Remove throttle body. Left bank Right bank 8. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connectors, then remove ignition coils. 9. Remove all spark plugs. ^ Clean area around plug with compressed air before removing the spark plug. 1 of 2 2 of 2 10. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. Page 751 Description Part 1 Page 907 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3567 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 572 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5067 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4938 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 2064 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 3799 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5230 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3543 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4765 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Component Description The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 2202 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1338 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2082 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 4733 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4407 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 944 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4649 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5849 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Front Door Switch LH Front Door Switch RH Front Door Switch LH Front Door Switch RH Front Door Switch LH Page 1434 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4476 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 3107 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No. signal. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No. signal. Page 3821 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4182 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5520 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 77 With Navigation System Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression presure Standard 1275 kPa Minimum 981 kPa Differential limit between cylinders 98 kPa Cylinder number See image Page 2975 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Steering - Pull/Drift Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 5324 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1239 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3625 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4828 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1031 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1154 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3570 EC-PNP/SW-01 Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF". WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 4006 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 5839 Description Part 1 Page 3034 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3049 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Specifications Page 4175 Part 1 Page 3307 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4911 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3781 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3582 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3319 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1018 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5500 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5763 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5620 EC-PNP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 1704 Outside Degree Minute Locations Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 4756 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3976 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. The knock sensor has one trip detection logic. Page 3679 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 837 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 408 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Page 3169 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5380 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2193 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2896 Page 2205 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1148 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4344 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4395 Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Page 1712 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Check - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel damper and injector tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321). 3. Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as shown in the figure. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/sq.cm, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/sq.cm, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory perform Fuel Pressure Regulator Check. Page 3390 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2837 Page 780 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5661 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1294 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4116 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g.m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g.m/sec at 2,500 rpm* *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 1986 Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the test group shown above. Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. Amount of lubricant to be added Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If OK, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT". 3. Connect ACR4 to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/ recycling equipment. 5. Remove the drain plug of the "old" (removed) compressor. Drain the lubricant into a graduated container and record the amount of drained lubricant. 6. Remove the drain plug and drain the lubricant from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. Torque the drain plug. V-6 compressor: 18 - 19 N.m (1.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb) 10. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl.oz, 0.2 Imp fl.oz) of lubricant at this time. Page 5694 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 4944 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3857 Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Pulley / Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Page 4859 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Component Description The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the engine. Page 5604 Part 1 Page 4224 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1594 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position (PNP) switch is "ON". ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the "ON" signal) exists. For All models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. Page 4225 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4519 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 802 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2996 Part 5 Page 581 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air the greater the heat loss. Therefore the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 5284 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1145 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 889 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Locations Component View A Page 5718 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5408 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Description and Operation Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation SENSOR The sensor unit consists of a gear-shaped sensor rotor and a sensor element. The element contains a bar magnet around which a coil is wound. The front sensors are installed on the front spindles and the rear sensors are installed on the rear spindles. As the wheel rotates, the sensor generates a sine-wave pattern. The frequency and voltage increase(s) as the rotating speed increases. Page 5193 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 741 EC-LOAD-01 Page 4414 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 3445 EC-PST/SW-01 Page 5649 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3828 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 881 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Locations Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 2283 2 of 2 7. Check only those valves shown in the figure. ^ Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. ^ Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance for checking (Cold): Intake 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) 8. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 9. Set No. 3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 Page 4202 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4591 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3909 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 361 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 983 Part 1 Part 2 Page 358 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4132 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5646 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3956 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3129 Part 1 Page 2479 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3261 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 920 EC-O2S2B2-01 Description and Operation Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based on the resistance of the thermal transmitter. As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable ground is supplied to terminal 18 of the combination meter for the water temperature gauge. The needle on the gauge moves from "C" to "H". Page 4710 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5323 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 933 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2707 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5463 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Page 2071 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 715 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4168 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4525 Part 6 Page 913 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-O2H1B1-01 Page 740 EC-LOAD-01 Connector Views Page 5091 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3987 Step 3 - 6 Page 5846 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5570 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1070 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 950 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4808 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 1726 Step 28 - 30 Page 4867 Part 7 Page 374 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3548 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 561 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3195 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1143 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3222 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4465 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 1407 EC-PHASE-01 Connector Views Page 2286 8. Blow air into the hole to separate adjusting shim from valve lifter. 9. Remove adjusting shim using a small screwdriver and a magnetic finger. 10. Determine replacement adjusting shim size following formula. ^ Using a micrometer determine thickness of removed shim. ^ Calculate thickness of new adjusting shim so valve clearance comes within specified values. R = Thickness of removed shim N = Thickness of new shim M = Measured valve clearance Intake: N = R + [M - 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch)] Exhaust: N = R + [M - 0.33 mm (0.0130 inch)] Shims are available in 64 sizes from 2.32 mm (0.0913 inch) to 2.95 mm (0.1161 inch), in steps of 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch). ^ Select new shim with thickness as close as possible to calculated value. Page 1306 Part 1 Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 Page 530 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Replacement For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to "Installation - Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable". - Each switch can be replaced without removing combination switch base. - To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching screw. - Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel guide pins with the screws which secure the combination switch as shown in the figure. Page 3572 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment 1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly. 2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in "N" position. 3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. 4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible. 5. Reinstall any part removed. 6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Replacement CAUTION: When removing the oil pans, oil pump assembly and timing chain from engine, first remove the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), intake valve timing control position sensor and the crankshaft position sensors (REF)/(POS) from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edges. OIL SEAL INSTALLATION DIRECTION ^ Install new oil seal in the direction shown in the figure. REAR OIL SEAL 1. Remove transmission. 2. Remove flywheel or drive plate. 3. Remove oil pan. 4. Remove rear oil seal retainer. 5. Remove old liquid gasket using scraper. ^ Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt hole and thread. 6. Apply liquid gasket to rear oil seal retainer. Page 995 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4794 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 4795 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 1358 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 897 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1068 Part 1 Page 5798 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 5655 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 934 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1019 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1569 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5394 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 922 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the front tube. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 V to 0 V. HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2 after three way catalyst monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 3958 Part 1 Page 1106 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 629 Description Part 1 Page 5824 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5143 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4695 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3940 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1458 Description Part 1 Page 4562 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4717 Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-O2H1B1-01 Page 4576 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views EC-FLS1-01 Connector Views EC-FLS2-01 Connector Views EC-FLS3-01 Connector Views Page 215 Part 8 Page 5274 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4358 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the gear teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). CKP SENSOR Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan (upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead Center) signal (120° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal (120° signal). Page 910 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2317 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 4330 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5342 EC-TP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 603 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2918 Page 2590 Step 7 - 10 Page 1526 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2548 Step 23 - 24 Page 2404 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4210 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 156 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 3566 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1812 A. Remove the engine decorative cover (see Figure 1) B. Remove four 10 mm head screws (two rear, two front) which hold the harness to the intake collector on the passenger side (see Figure 2). C. Remove the intake air duct (see Figure 3). Locations Cruise Control Switch: Locations Component Locations Overall view Component View C Page 2705 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2486 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Specifications Drive Belt Tensioner: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Maintenance DRIVE BELT DEFLECTION Used belt deflection Deflection of new belt Limit Deflection after adjustment Alternator Power steering oil pump Fan 7 (0.28) 4-5 (0.16-0.20) 3.5-4.5 (0.138-0.177) Air conditioner compressor 12 (0.47) 9-10 (0.35-0.39) 8 - 9 (0.31 - 0.35) Applied pushing force 98 N (10kg, 22 Ib) DRIVE BELT TENSION Unit: N (kg, Ib) Used belt New belt Limit After adjustment Generator Power steering oil pump Fan 294 (30, 66) 730-818(74.4-83.5, 164 - 184) 838 - 926 (85.4 - 94.5, 188 - 208) Air conditioner compressor 196 (20, 44) 348 - 436 (35.5 - 44.5, 78 - 98) 470 - 559 (47.9 - 57.0, 106 - 126) Page 465 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 3344 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3054 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1530 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4324 Description Part 1 Page 5764 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5608 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2123 8. Retighten wheel bearing lock nut with Tool. 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (0.05 - 0.15 kg.m, 4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) 9. Measure wheel bearing axial end play. Axial end play: 0 mm (0 inch) 10. Measure starting force "A" at wheel hub bolt. 11. Install lock washer by tightening the lock nut within 15 to 30 degrees. 12. Turn wheel hub several times in both directions to seat wheel bearing correctly. 13. Measure starting force "B" at wheel hub bolt. Refer to procedure 10. 14. Wheel bearing preload "C" can be calculated as shown. C = B - A Wheel bearing preload "C": 7.06 - 20.99 N (0.72 - 2.14 kg, 1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) 15. If wheel bearing preload "C" is outside specifications, remove lock washer. Tighten or loosen lock nut within +15 degrees (Refer to step 11 above). Install lock washer, then repeat steps 12, 13 and 14. 16. Repeat above procedures until correct axial end play and wheel bearing preload are obtained. 17. Install drive flange (4WD models) and wheel hub cap. Page 4698 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3160 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5098 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3087 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4470 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 5141 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1095 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4646 Part 1 Page 5339 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4351 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1469 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4296 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4279 Description Part 1 Page 2709 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1274 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4074 ^ It is not necessary to remove any coolant hoses or drain the coolant during ignition coil removal. 6. Replace the resistor assembly in all ignition coil tubes as follows: A. Pull the rubber boot away from the ignition coil. Then, twist and pull the ignition coil tube from the ignition coil to separate them (see Figure 7). B. Remove the old resistor assembly parts from the ignition coil tube and discard. Insert the new resistor assembly into the ignition coil tube in the order shown in Figure 8 shown. C. Assemble the ignition coil tube to the ignition coil. ^ Rotate the tube while pressing onto the coil. ^ A "pop" sound will be heard when the rubber boot is seated correctly to the ignition coil. Page 2981 Engine Control Module: Connector Views ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout Page 622 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No. signal. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No. signal. Page 1408 EC-PHASE-01 Page 4493 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4637 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4845 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 270 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3181 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3804 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 779 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4611 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1388 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5697 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 78 Overall View Component H View Page 3347 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5411 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5118 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4663 EC-KS-01 Page 323 Rear Door Switch Door Lock And Unlock Switch LH Front Door Switch LH Rear Door Switch Page 4094 11. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open. 12. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 13. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 14. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. ^ If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. ^ If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace them. ^ If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 15. Install parts in reverse order of removal. 16. Perform "Self-diagnosis Procedure" if any DTC appears. Refer to Powertrain Management; Computers and Control Systems. Page 1534 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1260 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3099 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5687 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4082 D. Remove the 10mm bolt holding the metal EVAP purge pipe to the intake collector. Remove the four throttle chamber bolts (6mm socket head capscrews) - see Figure 4. E. Remove the throttle chamber gasket and discard (see Figure 5). CAUTION: DO NOT allow anything to fall into the intake manifold or intake tube. F. Remove all ignition coils by disconnecting each coil harness connector and removing the screw, holding each coil to the engine. Notes: ^ The harness of each ignition coil is numbered (1 through 6) near the connector to assist in proper re-installation. ^ You must lift the throttle chamber slightly to reach the # 4 ignition coil (see Figure 6). Page 4201 Description Part 1 Page 5314 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3304 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4489 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3741 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5717 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1035 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3334 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5636 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2858 4. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Use Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. 5. Return the crankshaft pulley to its original position by turning it 20° forward. 6. Install timing chain tensioner, then remove the stopper pin. ^ When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. ^ After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioners. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. 7. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal. Page 4425 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5200 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4438 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 5153 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1026 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3544 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3890 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2864 - Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 of J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. - Do not overtorque the oxygen sensor. Doing so may cause damage to the oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. Page 3721 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2572 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 3639 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5402 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4190 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5615 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4748 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5619 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2959 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4704 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2943 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 1531 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Component Locations Engine Compartment Page 2282 Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection CHECKING Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove air duct with air cleaner case, collectors, hoses, wires, harnesses, connectors and so on. 3. Remove intake manifold collectors. 4. Remove ignition coils and spark plugs. 5. Remove RH and LH rocker covers. 6. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. ^ Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. ^ Check that valve lifters on No. 1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No. 4 are tight. If not, turn crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. 1 of 2 Page 1172 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5235 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4283 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3825 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1271 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 771 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2595 Step 23 - 24 Page 2356 30. Remove O-rings from cylinder block and oil pump body. 31. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. Installation 1. Before installing oil pan, remove old liquid gasket from mating surface using a scraper. ^ Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block. ^ Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt hole and thread. 2. Apply sealant to front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. Page 4518 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid .................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 5.1L (5.38 Qt US) Page 4760 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 838 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2358 8. Install the four engine-to-transmission bolts. 9. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Page 5366 Part 1 Page 3688 EC-PRE/SE-01 Page 3374 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 712 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3817 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2956 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 352 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5199 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4309 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4266 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2995 Part 4 Page 3914 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1413 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Oil Filter / Crankshaft Pulley / Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Harness Connector Oil Pan / Crankshaft Position Sensor Harness Connector Page 1660 3. Road test the vehicle again. If the vehicle continues to pull in the same direction or in the opposite direction continue with step 4. 4. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Record the caster, camber and toe-in measurements and refer to the vehicle information below. NOTE: When performing a wheel alignment always use the steering wheel to change the position of the road wheels. Turning the steering from the road wheel will affect the accuracy of the readings provided by the alignment equipment. Passenger Cars, Quest, and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the front wheel alignment is within specification perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure. ^ Caster and Camber are not adjustable on these models. In some cases the Caster and Camber can be changed slightly by loosening related suspension component such as the upper strut mount and lower link pivot and shifting the strut and lower link in the direction needed to bring it into alignment. If the front wheel alignment is still out of specification, it is likely a component is bent. Determine the cause and repair as necessary. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Frontier/Xterra/Truck/1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the camber to be equal on both sides of the vehicle. ^ Adjust the caster equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range and road test to determine if the pull is corrected. If the vehicle continues to pull, adjust the left and right side caster as indicated below to compensate for the pull. ^ Adjust the toe-in to specification. Effects of caster setting on vehicle pull ^ If the left front caster setting is higher than the right front, the car will pull to the right. ^ If the right front caster setting is higher than the left front, the car will pull to the left. Steering Wheel Off-Center Diagnosis And Repair 1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack. 2. Set the road wheels in the straight ahead position. 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. Page 2818 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4769 Step 7 - 8 Locations Thermal Transmitter Connector Page 4461 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 3816 Description Part 1 Page 5447 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21-26 Nm, 16-19 ft lb Page 280 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3368 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 723 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Secondary Suppression Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Classification: EL02-007 Reference: NTB02-040 Date: April 12, 2002 2002 PATHFINDER STATIC RADIO NOISE CAUSED BY IGNITION COILS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before: JN8DR09X*2W655078 JN8DR09Y*2W713864 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: October 22, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If the radio of an Applied Vehicle exhibits the following symptom: ^ A steady, rhythmic static noise heard from the speakers that "follows" engine speed on certain FM radio stations, The cause may be the ignition coil resistors. A new resistor assembly (located inside the ignition coil tube) is available to repair the described symptom, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 2. Turn radio on and search for several FM stations until a steady "ticking" or "popping" noise is heard through the speakers. Notes: ^ Weaker radio stations may make the static noise easier to detect, if it exists. ^ Increasing the treble and decreasing the bass settings may also make the "ticking" noise easier to detect, if it exists. 3. If the incident is duplicated, accelerate the engine and note if the frequency of the "ticking" or "popping" noise increases with engine speed. 4. If the noise does not "follow" the engine speed, the incident is not caused by the ignition coils. Consult the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) to diagnose and repair the incident. 5. If the noise "follows" the engine speed, remove all ignition coils from the engine using the following procedure: Page 4619 EC-AAC/V-01 Connector Views Page 2719 Part 1 Mechanical Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) LUBRICANT Model CALSONIC KANSEI make V-6 Name Nissan A/C System Oil Type S Part number* KLHOO-PAGSO *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Page 3224 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5354 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3947 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4558 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 947 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1773 Step 28 - 30 Page 2724 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1232 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 698 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 171 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3486 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2198 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4647 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1256 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Locations Auto Light Sensor/Instrument Panel Page 5672 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2207 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2102 6. Reinstall the brake caliper assemblies. ^ Refer to the ESM for brake caliper installation instructions. Install new front pads and hardware kit 7. Replace the brake pads and hardware with the new ones listed in the Parts Information (see Figures 4 and 5). ^ Refer to the ESM for brake pad and hardware kit replacement instructions. ^ Use PBC grease between the brake pad, shim, and caliper piston to reduce potential noise. Do Not get grease on the brake pad surface. ^ (Brake pads and hardware shown for one side. Kit includes parts for both sides) ^ Install only one "V-spring" on each side as shown in Figure 5. 8. Reinstall the wheels and lug nuts. Tighten lug nuts to 87 - 108 ft-lb with a Torque Wrench. Front Wheel Bearing: Specifications Front WHEEL BEARING (FRONT) Wheel bearing lock nut Tightening Torque ...................................................................................................................................... 78 - 98 Nm (8 - 10 kg.m, 58 - 72 ft. lbs.) Retightening Torque After Loosening Wheel Bearing Lock Nut ............................................................................................................................................. 0.5 - 1.5 Nm (0.05 - 0.15 kg.m, 4.3 - 13.0 inch lbs.) Axial End Play ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 0 mm (0 inch) Starting Force At Wheel Hub Bolt ............................... ............................................................................................................................................ A Turning Angle ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 15° - 30° Starting Force At Wheel Hub Bolt ........................................... ................................................................................................................................ B Wheel bearing preload at wheel hub bolt B - A ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.06 - 20.99 N (0.72 - 2.14 kg, 1.59 - 4.72 lbs.) Page 2403 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1380 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3397 EC-O2S1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2S2B2-01 Connector Views Page 3384 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4918 EC-MAFS-01 Connector Views Page 5711 Description Part 1 Page 4809 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2958 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2316 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 5092 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5425 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position (PNP) switch is "ON". ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the "ON" signal) exists. For All models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. Page 904 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4494 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Page 3442 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5006 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4273 EC-ECTS-01 Page 1987 Lubricant Adjusting Procedure For Compressor Replacement Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl.oz, 0.2 Imp fl.oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor. Diagram Information and Instructions Knock Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5052 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1844 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 2125 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair FRONT WHEEL BEARING Apply multi-purpose grease sparingly to the following parts: - Threaded portion of spindle - Contact surface between wheel bearing lock washer (chamfered side) and outer wheel bearing - Grease seal lip - Wheel hub (as shown) Page 758 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5779 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2668 Page 3870 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2012 Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: - If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of problem. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 3130 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 35 Navigation Module: Locations Components Locations Overall View Component View C Page 4992 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Page 3913 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4592 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2238 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Head Assembly; Service and Repair. Page 5353 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations ECM / ECM Harness Connector Overall View Component View D Connecting Rod Bolt Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting rod cap bolts Step 1 19 - 21 Nm Step 2 90 - 95° Page 4341 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1915 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Checking All-Mode Checking All-mode 4WD Transfer Fluid Check for oil leakage and fluid level. A/T fluid is used for the all-mode 4WD transfer in the factory. Never start engine while checking fluid level. Filler plug: Tightening Torque: 10 - 20 N-m (1.0 - 2.0 kg-m, 87 - 174 in-lb) Page 1317 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1443 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Components Locations Overall View Component View C Page 2051 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 5019 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1357 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 648 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3085 Part 1 Part 2 Page 854 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1593 EC-PNP/SW-01 Page 4854 Part 4 Page 341 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Rotor Front Sensor Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove the front wheel hub. 2. Remove the sensor rotor using suitable puller, drift and bearing replacer. INSTALLATION Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. ^ Always replace sensor rotor with new one. ^ Pay attention to the direction of front sensor rotor as shown. Rear Sensor Rotor REMOVAL Remove the sensor rotor using Tool. INSTALLATION Install the sensor rotor using suitable drift and press. ^ Always replace sensor rotor with new one. Page 3617 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3545 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 2725 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 790 Front Bumper LH Side / Intake Air Temperature Sensor Harness Connector Page 209 Part 2 Page 2084 ^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the outside surface of chrome type wheels. Wheel Alignment: ^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels. ^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be used to cover the metal mounting hooks. Page 5735 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3141 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2723 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3672 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3511 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4104 10. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 11. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 12. Set No. 5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 13. Check only those valves shown in the figure. 14. If all valve clearances are within specification, install the following parts. If they are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. ^ Intake manifold collectors ^ RH and LH rocker covers ^ All spark plugs ^ All ignition coils Page 4265 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5761 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1228 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4073 D. Remove the 10mm bolt holding the metal EVAP purge pipe to the intake collector. Remove the four throttle chamber bolts (6mm socket head capscrews) - see Figure 4. E. Remove the throttle chamber gasket and discard (see Figure 5). CAUTION: DO NOT allow anything to fall into the intake manifold or intake tube. F. Remove all ignition coils by disconnecting each coil harness connector and removing the screw, holding each coil to the engine. Notes: ^ The harness of each ignition coil is numbered (1 through 6) near the connector to assist in proper re-installation. ^ You must lift the throttle chamber slightly to reach the # 4 ignition coil (see Figure 6). Page 5136 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4723 EC-O2S2B1-01 Page 322 Front Door Switch LH Key Switch Door Lock And Unlock Switch LH Door Lock And Unlock Switch RH Front Door Switch Page 3118 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 61 Overall View Component View C Page 435 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVCS-R-01 Page 3805 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 781 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3098 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1194 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3356 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 269 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2509 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4928 Description Part 1 Page 4798 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 4457 Page 5181 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3759 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 876 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 RH Harness Connector / Engine Front Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Left Bank) / Transmission / Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Right Bank) Page 177 Part 1 Part 2 Specifications TIMING CHAIN Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston skirt diameter "A" Standard Grade No. 1 95.480 - 95.490 mm Grade No. 2 95.490 - 95.500 mm No grade No. is punched on piston Grade No. 3 95.500 - 95.510 mm 0.20 mm oversize (service) 95.680 - 95.710 mm "a" dimension 41.0 mm Piston pin hole diameter Grade No. 1 21.993 - 21.999 mm Grade No. 2 21.999 - 22.005 mm Piston clearance to cylinder block 0.010 - 0.030 mm Page 2978 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Specifications Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760 Ohm MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550 Ohm Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair The OEM does not provide a Maintenance Required Indicator for this model. Page 2465 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3255 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4029 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED - Using CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. Page 3627 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1566 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4286 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4976 Type Of Standardized Relays Description and Operation Oil Filter: Description and Operation OIL FILTER The oil filter is a small, full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. ^ Use Tool specified for changing oil filter. Page 2982 Part 1 Page 1694 The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Pull can occur as a result of incorrect wheel alignment, tire condition or steering rack sliding force. It can also occur as a result of excessive tire "conicity". This refers to a condition when the tire tread surface is not parallel to the axle centerline (see Figure 1). Conicity occurs during the manufacturing process and the tire may not show noticeable tread wear. When it occurs, it has the effect of the tire taking the shape of a cone. As a result, the tire has a tendency to roll towards the point of the cone. The vehicle will pull in the direction of the tire with the greatest conicity. If the tire conicity is equal on both sides of the vehicle, there is no effect on vehicle pull. Steering Wheel Off-Center Page 4594 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4233 EC-PHASE-01 Page 2540 Overall Inspection Sequence Page 4771 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 5083 Step 4 - 7 Page 5056 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1175 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1528 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1074 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 994 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3143 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 487 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1471 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Locations Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 5192 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1638 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 943 Part 1 Page 641 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1142 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1179 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5174 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 721 Electric Load Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3513 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3128 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4146 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5730 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications At idle Vaccuum hose connected 235 Kpa (2.4 kg/sq.cm 34 psi Vacuum hose disconnected 294 Kpa (3.0 kg/sq.cm 43 psi Cooling System - Water Pump O-Ring Design Change Water Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Water Pump O-Ring Design Change Classification: EM02-003 Reference: NTB02-050 Date: April 23, 2002 VQ ENGINE WATER PUMP 0-RING APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) 2002 Maxima (A33) 2002 Altima (L31) APPLIED DATE: See Figure 1 APPLIED ENGINE: VQ35DE SERVICE INFORMATION If, for any reason, the water pump needs to be serviced, please note that: ^ The front 0-ring (on the water pump) has changed ^ The new 0-ring is now black with a white paint mark instead of orange in color see Figure 1) Page 3518 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5817 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 803 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5381 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 772 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4268 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3997 Step 32 - 33 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Side clearance Top Standard 0.040 - 0.080 mm Limit 0.11 mm 2nd Standard 0.030 - 0.070 mm Limit 0.1 mm Oil ring 0.015 - 0.050 mm End gap Top Standard 0.23 - 0.33 mm Limit 0.54 mm 2nd Standard 0.33 - 0.48 mm Limit 0.80 mm Oil (rail ring) Standard 0.20 - 0.60 mm Limit 0.95 mm Page 1746 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 383 EC-ECTS-01 Page 847 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2299 Page 5176 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 185 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3446 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Component Description The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. When a power steering load is detected it signals the ECM. The ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and adjust for the increased load. Page 4089 Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling may occur with the standard type spark plug such as: - frequent engine starts - low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock may occur with the standard type spark plug such as: extended highway driving - frequent high engine revolution - Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/sq.cm, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Page 3930 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3675 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3745 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Transfer Case Noise/Hard Shifting Classification: TF02-006a Reference: NTB02-035a Date: September 9, 2002 PATHFINDER, FRONTIER, XTERRA MANUAL TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSIS This bulletin amends NTB02-035. This version includes additional symptoms in the diagnostic table. Please discard all paper copies of the earlier bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 1996 - 2002 Pathfinder (R50) - all equipped with Manual Transfer Case (TX10A) 1998 - 2002 Frontier (D22) - with 4 wheel drive 2000 - 2002 Xterra (WD22) - with 4 wheel drive. SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle has a noise, hard shifting, or dark oil in the transfer case, the transfer case may be OK. Before judging what repairs are needed, if any, refer to the information provided in the Transfer Case Diagnostic Table for assistance in determining: ^ Symptom ^ Possible Cause, and ^ Service Information. Page 1345 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2803 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1892 Refer to the "Essential Tool Shipment" flyer shown for additional information. This special tool is "Essential" and was automatically sent to all Nissan dealers. Additional tools can be ordered from Tech-Mate (1-800-662-2001) for $196.43 each. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the tool for complete refill procedure. Key points to ensure the cooling system is purged of air bubbles are as follows; Always start with an Empty Radiator For step 2 of the Operating Instructions: ^ To hold the coolant mixture supply, use a clean bucket or other suitable container that is larger than the cooling system's total capacity. ^ The amount of coolant mixture in the refill supply must be more than needed to fill the system completely. Page 5647 Part 1 Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Electric Load Sensor: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 4830 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1727 Step 31 Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85 V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 V Page 1705 Alignment: Service and Repair FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT Before checking front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*). *: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Preliminary Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. NOTE: Measure both the inner and outer sides for the radial runout and lateral runout, and confirm the figures are within the standards. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. 5. Check steering linkage for looseness. 6. Check that front shock absorbers work properly. 7. Check vehicle posture (Unladen). Camber, Caster and Kingpin Inclination Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. 1. Measure camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge. Camber, Caster and Kingpin inclination. 2. If camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect front suspension parts. Replace damaged or worn out parts. Toe-in Measure toe-in using the following procedure. WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 meters (16 feet). Page 3879 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1518 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1300 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2221 Component Description Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow. The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The shorter pulse width retards valve angle. When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal the solenoid valve stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position. Page 3469 Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Secondary Suppression Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Rhythmic RPM Sensitive Static Noise Classification: EL02-007 Reference: NTB02-040 Date: April 12, 2002 2002 PATHFINDER STATIC RADIO NOISE CAUSED BY IGNITION COILS APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 Pathfinder (R50) APPLIED VIN: Vehicles built before: JN8DR09X*2W655078 JN8DR09Y*2W713864 APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: October 22, 2001 SERVICE INFORMATION If the radio of an Applied Vehicle exhibits the following symptom: ^ A steady, rhythmic static noise heard from the speakers that "follows" engine speed on certain FM radio stations, The cause may be the ignition coil resistors. A new resistor assembly (located inside the ignition coil tube) is available to repair the described symptom, if it should occur. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Start the engine and allow it to idle. 2. Turn radio on and search for several FM stations until a steady "ticking" or "popping" noise is heard through the speakers. Notes: ^ Weaker radio stations may make the static noise easier to detect, if it exists. ^ Increasing the treble and decreasing the bass settings may also make the "ticking" noise easier to detect, if it exists. 3. If the incident is duplicated, accelerate the engine and note if the frequency of the "ticking" or "popping" noise increases with engine speed. 4. If the noise does not "follow" the engine speed, the incident is not caused by the ignition coils. Consult the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) to diagnose and repair the incident. 5. If the noise "follows" the engine speed, remove all ignition coils from the engine using the following procedure: Specifications Oil Pressure Regulator Valve: Specifications Oil pressure regulator valve Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance 0.040 - 0.097 mm Page 3763 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1723 Step 21 - 22 Page 4584 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Locations Intake Air Duct / IACV-ACC Valve Page 2353 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal WARNING: ^ Place vehicle on a flat and solid surface. ^ You should not remove oil pan until exhaust system and cooling system have completely cooled off. Otherwise, you may burn yourself and/or fire may break out in the fuel line. ^ When removing front engine mounting nuts, lift up slightly engine for safety work. CAUTION: When removing the aluminum oil pan from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensors (POS and REF) from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edges and signal plate teeth. 1. Remove front RH and LH wheels. 2. Remove battery. 3. Remove oil level gauge. 4. Remove engine undercover. 5. Remove suspension member stay. 6. Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug. 7. Disconnect A/T oil cooler hoses. (A/T) 8. Drain engine oil. 9. Remove the crankshaft position sensors (REF and POS). 10. Remove drive belts and idler pulley with bracket. 11. Remove power steering oil pump, then put it aside holding with a suitable wire. 12. Remove alternator. 13. Install engine slingers. Page 711 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 960 EC-PST/SW-01 Page 3268 Fuel Level Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-FLS1-01 Page 5190 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1880 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Brake Fluid Level ^ Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max and Min lines on reservoir tank. ^ If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system. ^ If the brake warning lamp comes on, check brake fluid level switch and parking brake switch. Page 4369 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5441 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5454 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3115 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1681 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4416 Part 1 Page 3611 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Page 129 Page 3827 Part 1 Part 2 Page 481 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1938 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Carrier Gear Oil, Front (4WD)/Rear Standard differential Gear ................................................................................................................... ................................................................... API GL-5 Limited-slip differential (LSD) gear: Use only LSD gear oil API GL-5 and SAE 80W-90 Approved for NISSAN LSD. SAE 90 is acceptable in ambient temperatures above -18°C (0°F) Page 2434 - Check that intake and exhaust cam nose on No. 1 cylinder are installed as shown. If not, turn the crankshaft one revolution (360°) and align as above. A/T model M/T model 22. Remove starter motor, and set ring gear stopper using the mounting bolt hole. - Be careful not to damage the signal plate teeth. 23. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolt. 24. Remove crankshaft pulley with a suitable puller. 25. Remove aluminum oil pan. 26. Temporarily install the suspension member bolts and engine mounting nuts. 27. Remove intake valve timing control valve covers. Page 4556 Part 1 Part 2 Page 167 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3212 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 567 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4662 EC-KS-01 Connector Views Page 3800 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 763 Fuel Level Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1477 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3862 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2771 See the "FAST" parts system for the Radiator Cap applicable to the vehicle you're working on. SERVICE PROCEDURE During normal scheduled maintenance or for a vehicle with one of the symptoms listed under IF YOU CONFIRM, inspect the Black Rubber Gasket on the end of the Metal Plunger of the radiator cap. View the Black Rubber Gasket by looking at the bottom side of the radiator cap. A. The Black Rubber Gasket should be smaller in diameter than the Metal Plunger under it (see Figure 2). If the Metal Plunger can be seen around the edge of the Black Rubber Gasket, and the gasket is clean without any deposits of a waxy residue or foreign material, the gasket is OK. NOTE: Make sure you pressure test the radiator cap and confirm it opens and closes at the correct specifications. B. If the Metal Plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the Black Rubber Gasket (see Figure 3), the radiator cap must be replaced. ^ Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. ^ Install a new radiator cap. C. If the Metal Plunger can be seen around the edge of the Black Rubber Gasket, but there are deposits of waxy residue or foreign material on the gasket or the metal retainer (see Figure 4), the radiator cap must be replaced. ^ Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign materia. Page 2893 Page 5399 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3761 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4386 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5198 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5057 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3632 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 2701 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 4223 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3916 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5272 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2349 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Changing Oil Filter 1. Remove oil filter with Tool. WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot. The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. Refer to "Oil Filter". 2. Clean oil filter mounting surface on cylinder block. Coat rubber seal of new oil filter with engine oil. 3. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. 4. Add engine oil. Refer to "Changing Engine Oil". - Clean excess oil from engine. Page 3508 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5556 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4374 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2706 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2823 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 1439 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 599 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4463 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3208 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1774 Step 31 Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 425 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Engine Oil: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). GEAR OIL 75W-90 for transfer, and 80W-90 for differential are preferable. Page 1857 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Nissan does not provide a service procedure for a cabin air filter. Page 4752 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4338 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1237 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5012 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 660 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 4929 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1000 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5509 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3180 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4181 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1436 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1238 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 5679 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 981 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 890 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3944 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5677 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 4806 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 4994 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5578 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5080 EC-LOAD-01 Page 5400 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 738 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 5610 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4421 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Description and Operation Contents Of Switch Working Page 2131 Page 3602 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5811 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5419 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3744 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5149 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5085 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 3401 EC-O2H2B2-01 Page 360 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3659 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3349 EC-KS-01 Connector Views Page 1099 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3680 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3407 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the front tube. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 V to 0 V. HO2S2 Component Description The heated oxygen sensor 2 after three way catalyst monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are shifted the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. Page 1318 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1650 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 568 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4960 EC-PHASE-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3366 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1227 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4316 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 480 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1351 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3557 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 856 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3893 EC-PHASE-01 Page 4548 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1077 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 888 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 384 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 2545 Step 14 - 18 Page 2394 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3431 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5577 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1652 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 644 Part 1 Page 3474 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2778 See the "FAST" parts system for the Radiator Cap applicable to the vehicle you're working on. SERVICE PROCEDURE During normal scheduled maintenance or for a vehicle with one of the symptoms listed under IF YOU CONFIRM, inspect the Black Rubber Gasket on the end of the Metal Plunger of the radiator cap. View the Black Rubber Gasket by looking at the bottom side of the radiator cap. A. The Black Rubber Gasket should be smaller in diameter than the Metal Plunger under it (see Figure 2). If the Metal Plunger can be seen around the edge of the Black Rubber Gasket, and the gasket is clean without any deposits of a waxy residue or foreign material, the gasket is OK. NOTE: Make sure you pressure test the radiator cap and confirm it opens and closes at the correct specifications. B. If the Metal Plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the Black Rubber Gasket (see Figure 3), the radiator cap must be replaced. ^ Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. ^ Install a new radiator cap. C. If the Metal Plunger can be seen around the edge of the Black Rubber Gasket, but there are deposits of waxy residue or foreign material on the gasket or the metal retainer (see Figure 4), the radiator cap must be replaced. ^ Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign materia. Page 2197 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2968 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2781 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection CHECKING RADIATOR CAP To check radiator cap, apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: Standard 78 - 98 kPa (0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 11 - 14 psi) Limit 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) Pull the negative pressure valve to open it. Check that it closes completely when released. Page 1296 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Locations Component View A Page 1728 Step 32 - 33 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 4251 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3457 Description Part 1 Page 2793 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5528 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 5765 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4034 Step 3 - 6 Page 5156 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 991 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3211 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1836 Valve Clearance: Adjustments ADJUSTING Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. 1. Turn crankshaft, to position cam lobe on camshaft of valve that must be adjusted upward. 2. Thoroughly wipe off engine oil around adjusting shim using a rag. 3. Using a extra-fine screwdriver, turn the round hole of the adjusting shim in the direction of the arrow. 4. Place Tool (A) around camshaft as shown in figure. Before placing Tool (A), rotate notch toward center of cylinder head (See figure.), to simplify shim removal later. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (A). 5. Rotate Tool (A) (See figure.) so that valve lifter is pushed down. 6. Place Tool (B) between camshaft and the edge of the valve lifter to retain valve lifter. CAUTION: ^ Tool (B) must be placed as close to camshaft bracket as possible. ^ Be careful not to damage cam surface with Tool (B). 7. Remove Tool (A). Page 3242 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5242 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4329 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4203 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5848 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5847 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1013 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4217 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 205 Part 8 Page 5803 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3779 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5721 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5337 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4688 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 674 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Specifications Crankshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Crankshaft Position Sensor (REF) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] 470 - 570 Ohm Page 4220 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4590 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4174 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1830 2.60 mm 260 2.61 mm 261 2.62 mm 262 2.63 mm 263 2.64 mm 264 2.65 mm 265 2.66 mm 266 2.67 mm 267 2.68 mm 268 2.69 mm 269 2.70 mm 270 2.71 mm 271 2.72 mm 272 2.73 mm 273 2.74 mm 274 2.75 mm 275 2.76 mm 276 2.77 mm 277 2.78 mm 278 2.79 mm 279 2.80 mm 280 2.81 mm 281 2.82 mm 282 2.83 mm 283 2.84 mm 284 2.85 mm 285 2.86 mm 286 2.87 mm 287 2.88 mm 288 2.89 mm 289 2.90 mm 290 2.91 mm 291 Page 3749 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2521 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4968 Description Part 1 Page 1295 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5413 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 5134 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 54 Page 5560 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5617 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 812 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5533 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2792 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3330 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 630 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4606 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 5758 Description Part 1 Page 2389 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3884 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1141 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5538 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3060 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4509 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3989 Step 11 - 13 Page 1575 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 980 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4420 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4218 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1533 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1747 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 1215 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4916 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3782 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2957 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2637 D. Remove the 10mm bolt holding the metal EVAP purge pipe to the intake collector. Remove the four throttle chamber bolts (6mm socket head capscrews) - see Figure 4. E. Remove the throttle chamber gasket and discard (see Figure 5). CAUTION: DO NOT allow anything to fall into the intake manifold or intake tube. F. Remove all ignition coils by disconnecting each coil harness connector and removing the screw, holding each coil to the engine. Notes: ^ The harness of each ignition coil is numbered (1 through 6) near the connector to assist in proper re-installation. ^ You must lift the throttle chamber slightly to reach the # 4 ignition coil (see Figure 6). Page 4099 2.60 mm 260 2.61 mm 261 2.62 mm 262 2.63 mm 263 2.64 mm 264 2.65 mm 265 2.66 mm 266 2.67 mm 267 2.68 mm 268 2.69 mm 269 2.70 mm 270 2.71 mm 271 2.72 mm 272 2.73 mm 273 2.74 mm 274 2.75 mm 275 2.76 mm 276 2.77 mm 277 2.78 mm 278 2.79 mm 279 2.80 mm 280 2.81 mm 281 2.82 mm 282 2.83 mm 283 2.84 mm 284 2.85 mm 285 2.86 mm 286 2.87 mm 287 2.88 mm 288 2.89 mm 289 2.90 mm 290 2.91 mm 291 Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3220 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4504 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 3968 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 80 The PTC is built into the A/C auto amp. It can be set at an interval of 0.5 °C (1.0 °F) in the 18 °C (65 °F) to 32 °C (85 °F) temperature range by pushing the temperature button. The set temperature is digitally displayed. Page 4474 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 4081 A. Remove the engine decorative cover (see Figure 1) B. Remove four 10 mm head screws (two rear, two front) which hold the harness to the intake collector on the passenger side (see Figure 2). C. Remove the intake air duct (see Figure 3). Page 3147 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 4145 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 5397 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5243 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4908 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid Capacity 0.9 L Page 815 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4570 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3669 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1517 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1337 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2420 EC-IVCS-L-01 Page 821 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 710 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5280 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 285 Control Module: Description and Operation System Description This circuit line (LAN) is used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/deceleration. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only in TCM but also ECM after the A/T related repair. Page 3236 Description Part 1 Page 3994 Step 25 - 27 Page 619 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3786 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 3166 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2438 Installation 1. Position crankshaft so that No. 1 piston is set at TDC on compression stroke. 2. Install crankshaft sprocket on crankshaft. - Make sure that mating marks on crankshaft sprocket face front of engine. 3. Install lower chain guide on dowel pin, with front mark on the guide facing upside. 4. Press and shrink the secondary chain tensioner sleeve, and fix it using stopper pins. - Lubricate threads and seat surfaces of camshaft sprocket bolts with new engine oil. Page 5133 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4515 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4418 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1464 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3891 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 602 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3752 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3256 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 985 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4757 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3599 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1549 Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position - After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering components, suspension components, and tires, or after adjusting wheel alignment, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. CAUTION: To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-II. (Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.) 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "CONTROL MODULE INPUT ITEM", and "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STEERING ANGLE SIGNAL" is within 0 ± 3.5 degrees. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Page 5311 Description Part 1 Page 3687 EC-PRE/SE-01 Connector Views Page 859 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF". WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 5348 Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 1813 D. Remove the 10mm bolt holding the metal EVAP purge pipe to the intake collector. Remove the four throttle chamber bolts (6mm socket head capscrews) - see Figure 4. E. Remove the throttle chamber gasket and discard (see Figure 5). CAUTION: DO NOT allow anything to fall into the intake manifold or intake tube. F. Remove all ignition coils by disconnecting each coil harness connector and removing the screw, holding each coil to the engine. Notes: ^ The harness of each ignition coil is numbered (1 through 6) near the connector to assist in proper re-installation. ^ You must lift the throttle chamber slightly to reach the # 4 ignition coil (see Figure 6). Page 2733 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3207 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 283 EC-AT/C-01 Connector Views Page 1900 When draining all the coolant in the system, also perform the following two steps. 1. Open drain plugs on right side of cylinder block and water pump side, then open air relief plugs to drain coolant. 2. Check drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated flush engine cooling system, "Refer to FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM". Page 637 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2570 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 4485 ECM / ECM Harness Connector Page 4573 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5773 Part 1 Page 4788 Page 5595 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2390 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3929 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5109 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5055 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 4306 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3328 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4980 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5029 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4640 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1040 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3758 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Electrical Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Electrical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14) V Output voltage at idle 1.2 - 1.8* V *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 1581 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1281 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 3872 Part 1 Part 2 Page 958 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1253 Description Part 1 Page 4411 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1679 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 3266 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3396 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views EC-O2H1B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S1B1-01 Connector Views Page 1069 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4655 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1362 EC-TPS-01 Connector Views Page 2780 Radiator Cap: Specifications Radiator cap Cap relief Pressure Standard 78 - 98 kPa Limit 59 - 98 kPa Page 800 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3000 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 4638 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Idle Speed: Customer Interest Engine Controls - Engine Idle Speed 25RPM Too High Classification: EC05-009 Reference: NTB05-067 Date: October 5, 2005 PROCEDURE TO COMPLETE IAVL WHEN IDLE SPEED NEEDS TO BE REDUCED. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 - 2005 models IF YOU CONFIRM The idle, in Park or Neutral, is more than 25 rpm above specification (with the engine warm), and/or DTC P0507 (ISC SYSTEM) is stored, NOTE: ^ This incident may be the result of recent cleaning or replacement of the throttle body. The vehicle "in-use" learned idle (IAVL) may be higher after throttle body deposits are reduced (by cleaning or replacement). ^ If DTCs other than P0507 are stored, you must correct the cause for those DTCs first. ^ After correcting other DTCs, if you still have a P0507 and/or an idle condition above specification, continue with this bulletin. ACTIONS To reduce idle RPM, perform the following in this order until IAVL successfully completes: 1. Check engine for vacuum leaks. 2. Perform IAVL procedure. 3. For 2002 and 2003 models: Check for newer ECM reprogramming data. If it's available, perform reprogramming, then try IAVL again. 2004 and 2005 models: Skip this step. 4. Reduce idle speed manually: a. Disconnect injectors one at a time until IAVL completes (see step 4 of the Service Procedure for details), b. Reconnect the injectors, clear DTCs, and perform final IAVL. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 1218 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Wheel Sensor Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Sensor Removal and Installation CAUTION: ^ Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ^ When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly and move it away. Front Wheel Sensor Rear Wheel Sensor Page 4805 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 3052 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2588 Step 1 - 2 Page 3818 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 957 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4328 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 1097 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 1190 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3394 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 2070 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 4565 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 687 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5781 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 2951 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5443 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4777 Page 4888 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1135 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5071 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1777 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. Page 607 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1278 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 4103 2 of 2 7. Check only those valves shown in the figure. ^ Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance between valve lifter and camshaft. ^ Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement adjusting shim. Valve clearance for checking (Cold): Intake 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 inch) Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 inch) 8. Turn crankshaft 240° and align as above. 9. Set No. 3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 1 of 2 2 of 2 Page 3706 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3506 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 5351 Description Part 1 Page 3399 EC-O2H1B2-01 Page 4827 Type Of Standardized Relays Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21-26 Nm, 16-19 ft lb Page 4560 Part 1 Page 4868 Part 8 Page 626 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 1767 Step 11 - 13 Page 1080 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2878 Page 2439 5. Install secondary timing chain and sprocket to one of the banks (Right bank shown in the figure) as described below. a. Align mating marks (golden links) on secondary timing chain with those (punched marks) on the intake and exhaust sprockets. b. Align camshaft knock pins with the sprocket groove and hole. - Because camshaft sprocket mounting bolts are tightened in step 7, perform manual tightening to the extent necessary to keep camshaft knock pin from dislocating. - Matching marks of the intake sprocket are on the back side of the secondary sprockets. There are two types of the marks; round and oval types, which should be used for right and left banks respectively. Right bank: Round Left bank: Oval - It may be difficult to visually check the dislocation of mating marks during and after installation. To make the matching easier, make a mating mark on the sprocket teeth in advance using paint. Page 1445 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1618 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 1012 Description Part 1 Page 3214 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2573 NOTE: Make sure all DTCs are cleared ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen within 2 minutes; go to step 5. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed, or test is not finished within 2 minutes: a. Disconnect another injector. b. Repeat step B above, NOTE: ^ For 4 cylinder engines up to 2 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. ^ For 6 and 8 cylinder engines up to 3 injectors can be disconnected one at a time. It is best that 3 disconnected injectors (particularly on V6 engines) not all be on the same engine bank. 5. Final IAVL procedure. A. Make sure all injectors are connected. B. Use CONSULT-II to erase any DTC that may be stored and clear Self Learn. C. Turn OFF the engine, then re-start it. D. After the engine idle has stabilized, perform IAVL again (step 2). Disclaimer Page 690 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2942 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 2514 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 3972 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4140 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3183 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 5654 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2737 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 473 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 2354 14. Remove front propeller shaft. (4WD) 15. Remove exhaust front tube heat insulators, then remove rear heat oxygen sensors. 16. Remove exhaust front tube from both sides. 17. Remove front final drive. (4WD) 18. Remove starter motor. 19. Disconnect oil pressure switch harness connector. 20. Loosen and disconnect the bolts fixing the steering column assembly lower joint and the power steering gear. 21. Set a suitable transmission jack under the front suspension member and hoist engine with engine slingers. 22. Remove front engine mounting nuts from both sides. Right side Page 3514 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3875 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 3449 Step 4 - 6 Page 839 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5562 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4623 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. Page 3820 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2857 2. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Apply engine oil and coolant to O-rings as shown in the figure. 2. Install water pump. ^ Do not allow cylinder block to nip O-rings when installing water pump. 3. Before installing, remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of liquid gasket from mating surface of front cover. Page 5728 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2062 Page 1053 Description Part 1 Page 5185 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 1447 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3173 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4372 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2718 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5591 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3497 Description Part 1 Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 1393 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3787 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5414 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 557 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2962 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1286 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 5211 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 1470 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3292 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5483 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 726 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 730 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4919 EC-MAFS-01 Page 915 EC-O2H2B1-01 Page 3945 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1765 Step 3 - 6 Page 5157 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Page 681 Part 1 Part 2 Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4250 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2979 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4446 Page 381 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1191 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 1639 Page 4645 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21-26 Nm, 16-19 ft lb Page 3413 Description Part 1 Page 4150 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3331 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5594 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4613 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5326 Part 1 Page 1265 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4552 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 5014 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3459 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2512 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 4914 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2950 Description Part 1 Page 846 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5534 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1932 Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection Checking M/T Oil Check for oil leakage and oil level. Never start engine while checking oil level. Filler plug: Tightening Torque: 25 - 34 N.m (2.5 - 3.5 kg-m, 18-25 ft-lb) Page 1073 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 593 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 845 Knock Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3478 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 413 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5656 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4939 Part 1 Part 2 Description and Operation Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation COMPONENT DESCRIPTION In-vehicle sensor The in-vehicle sensor is located on instrument lower panel. It converts variations in temperature of compartment air drawn from the aspirator into a resistance value. It is then input into the auto amplifier. Page 4990 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Locations Power Seat Control Module: Locations Driver's Seat Control Unit/Lifting Motor/Sliding Motor/Reclining Motor Overall View Component View J Page 1487 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 680 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5144 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 2052 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 5446 Part 1 Page 5732 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Steering - Pull/Drift Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. The information in the Service Procedure section was updated. Please discard paper copies of NTB00-037a. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Customers may use the term "vehicle pull" to describe a number of different potential incidents. This bulletin discusses some of the possible situations they may be attempting to describe, and provides diagnostic and repair information for each, should one occur. In some cases a vehicle may drift to one side of the road as a normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. In most cases the crown slopes from 1 to 1.5 percent to the right. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, typically with a small amount of counteracting left pull, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right (from the center). A vehicle may exhibit a small amount of pull to the left when driving in the left lane of a freeway with this condition. This bulletin does not address "repair" of road crown incidents because they are not vehicle related. Use the information provided in this bulletin to identify and repair other types of "vehicle pull". Incident Description: Pull The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed (60 MPH) on a straight, flat road. A vehicle is said to pull if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds with no steering correction from the driver when driving (at 60 MPH) on a crown-sloped road of less than 1 percent. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 3964 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3119 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Diagrams Page 1180 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3647 EC-VSS-01 Connector Views Page 1263 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5075 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3695 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g.m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g.m/sec at 2,500 rpm* *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 3037 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 422 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 923 Special/Commercial Service Tools Page 5431 Description Part 1 Mechanical Specifications Radiator: Mechanical Specifications Page 1684 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right (see Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition will occur if the toe-in is out of adjustment causing the tie rod length to be uneven from side to side. Wander The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. Page 3279 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3373 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1298 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1385 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 2467 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 1156 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4997 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4459 Attachment General Procedure Page 3678 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4797 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 1998 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit current. Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Page 4044 Step 32 - 33 INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 1911 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................. .................................................. NISSAN Matic "D" Continental U.S. and Alaska Canada ................................................................................................................................................ ........................ Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid DEXRON III / MERCON, or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental US and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brands of DEXRON III / MERCON A/T Fluid. Page 598 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1072 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 719 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 2643 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Changing Spark Plugs 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove throttle wires. 3. Remove air duct with air cleaner assembly. 4. Disconnect harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coil sides. 5. Remove throttle body. (Only when removing the No. 4 cylinder spark plug) 6. Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors. 7. Loosen ignition coil fixing bolts and pull out coil from intake manifold connector. Ignition coil: Tightening Torque: 8.5 - 10.7 N.m (0.86 - 1.1 kg-m, 75 - 95 in-lb) 8. Check type and gap of new spark plug. Spark plug type (Platinum-tipped type): Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Spark plug: Tightening Torque: 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14-22 ft-lb) Page 4363 Description Part 1 Page 5318 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 1893 ^ This will help avoid pulling in air at the end of the refilling procedure. NOTE: ^ See the appropriate Service Manual for cooling system refill capacity. ^ Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. For step 3 of the Operating Instructions: ^ Make sure to Purge all air from the Refill Tube (intake hose) before beginning the refill process. NOTE: The Venturi will NOT be harmed if some coolant goes through it during the air purge process. ^ Place the container of coolant mixture above the level of the radiator during the refill process. Page 3096 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2145 Page 1226 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 364 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 4895 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2003 Fuse: Testing and Inspection - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 429 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Vent Valve: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5121 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views EC-FLS1-01 Connector Views EC-FLS2-01 Connector Views EC-FLS3-01 Connector Views Page 566 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4861 Part 1 Page 4334 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4574 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 906 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Adjustments Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments PREPARATION 1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. - Battery - Ignition system - Engine oil and coolant levels - Fuses - ECM harness connector - Vacuum hoses - Air intake system (Oil filler cap oil level gauge etc.) - Fuel pressure - Engine compression - Throttle valve - Evaporative emission system 2. On air conditioner equipped models checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is "OFF". 3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio, checks should be carried out while shift lever is in "N" position. 4. When measuring "CO" percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. 5. Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear defogger. 6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. 7. Make the check after the cooling fan has stopped. Page 1584 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 23 Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. Service Procedure Navigation Operating System Software Upgrade Installation Procedure IMPORTANT NOTES: ^ Handle the Program CD-ROM by the edges only. Protect the surface from dirt, grease and scratches as this type of foreign material can prevent the navigation system from accessing the data on the CD-ROM. ^ After new software is loaded, the distance on the navigation system map may not match the actual miles driven. To correct this condition, advise the customer to drive the vehicle, with all car phones, cell phones, beepers. etc. turned off, at a speed greater than 19 MPH (30 km/h) for at least 20 to 30 minutes. This will automatically re-calibrate the navigation system. 1. Confirm which navigation system software version the vehicle is equipped with using the "Check the Map CD-ROM Version" procedure contained on the following 2001 model year Service Manual pages: EL-368 for Pathfinder and EL-373 for Maxima. A. If the vehicle is already equipped with the latest software upgrade (i.e WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33]), stop the process. B. If the vehicle is not equipped with the latest software upgrade (i.e., WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33]), install the latest software upgrade by proceeding with step 2 below. 2. Obtain the new 0/S programming CD-ROM from the Service Manager. 3. Park the vehicle on a level surface and firmly apply the parking brake. 4. Start the engine and let it run. 5. Press the "OPEN" button on the navigation system, then gently move the display downward to the locked position (see Figure 2). 6. Remove the customer's map disc from the navigation system. Store the disc carefully. Page 3213 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2983 Part 2 Page 1308 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4722 EC-O2S1B2-01 Page 4694 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5606 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 5322 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2219 EC-IVC-L-01 Page 5433 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 85 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Auto Amp. Check Auto Amp. Check Check power supply circuit for auto amp. with ignition switch ON. Measure voltage across terminal Nos. 26, 27, 33 (24, 25, 33) and body ground. Check body ground circuit for auto amp. with ignition switch OFF. Check for continuity between terminal Nos. 32, 14 and body ground. Page 1321 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1472 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5514 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 1574 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 217 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. Page 3346 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1468 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1161 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4376 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5720 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4715 Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views EC-O2H1B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H1B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B1-01 Connector Views EC-O2H2B2-01 Connector Views EC-O2S1B1-01 Connector Views Page 3624 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3707 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3887 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Specifications Camshaft Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) Resistance [at 20 deg C (68 deg F)] HITACHI make 1,440 - 1,760 Ohm MITSUBISHI make 2,090 - 2,550 Ohm Page 4957 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 997 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3864 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5043 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the gear teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). CKP SENSOR Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan (upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead Center) signal (120° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal (120° signal). Page 639 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 191 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1339 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1577 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5032 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4347 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4281 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2281 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve slearance Intake Cold 0.26 - 0.34 mm Hot (reference data) 0.304 - 0.416 mm Approximately 80 deg C Exhaust Cold 0.29 - 0.37 mm Hot (reference data) 0.308 - 0.432 mm Page 2147 TRANSFER CASE DIAGNOSTIC TABLE Page 3708 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 159 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 3619 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3722 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1118 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 5259 EC-O2S2B2-01 Page 5458 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3555 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4093 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection MEASUREMENT OF COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Warm up engine. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure. 4. Remove engine cover and throttle wire. 5. Remove air duct with air cleaner case. 6. Remove harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coils. 7. Remove throttle body. Left bank Right bank 8. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connectors, then remove ignition coils. 9. Remove all spark plugs. ^ Clean area around plug with compressed air before removing the spark plug. 1 of 2 2 of 2 10. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. Page 4559 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5622 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description When the gear position is "P" (A/T models only) or "N", park/neutral position (PNP) switch is "ON". ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the "ON" signal) exists. For All models, the park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly also includes a transmission range switch to detect selector lever position. Page 5023 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Replacement CAUTION: When removing the oil pans, oil pump assembly and timing chain from engine, first remove the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), intake valve timing control position sensor and the crankshaft position sensors (REF)/(POS) from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edges. VALVE OIL SEAL 1. Remove timing chain. 2. Remove camshaft brackets and camshaft. 3. Remove valve lifters and shims. 4. Remove valve spring with Tool. 5. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal. Before removing valve spring, fix valve as follows. Method A: Piston concerned should be set at TDC to prevent valve from falling. Method B: Remove spark plug, then install air hose adapter into spark plug hole and apply air pressure to hold valves in place. Apply a pressure of 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi). Method C: Install spark plug with suitable washer into spark plug hole from combustion chamber side. Page 5072 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 830 Engine Control Component Parts Location Part 1 Page 649 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2536 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Check - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel damper and injector tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321). 3. Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as shown in the figure. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/sq.cm, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/sq.cm, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory perform Fuel Pressure Regulator Check. Page 5103 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3467 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 2200 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1571 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1229 Part 1 Page 210 Part 3 Page 4599 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2474 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1352 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2338 Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Oil Filter Change ......................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 5.0L Without Oil Filter Change .................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 4.8L Dry Engine (after engine overhaul) ...................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 6.8L Page 3666 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4356 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-POS-01 Page 4462 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 745 Step 8 - 10 Page 3287 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1195 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3488 EC-TP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 3894 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No. signal. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No. signal. Service and Repair Refrigerant Lines - Removal And Installation Page 4464 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 1496 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Satellite Sensor REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect battery ground cable and wait at least 3 minutes. - Do not use old bolts coated with bonding agent after removal; replace with new ones. - Check satellite sensor for proper installation. - Check satellite sensor to ensure they are free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - After replacement of satellite sensor, check SRS function and perform self-diagnosis for SRS. Refer to "SRS Operation Check" for details. - Do not attempt to disassemble satellite sensor. - Replace satellite sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to "Front Seat Belt" for details. 2. Disconnect satellite sensor connector. 3. Remove satellite sensor fixing nuts. Then remove the satellite sensor. NOTE: To install, reverse the removal procedure sequence. Page 3539 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2600 Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. Page 3521 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3188 EC-REF-01 Page 4790 Attachment General Procedure Page 497 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Alignment Camber Minimum -0 deg 35' Degree Minute Nominal 0 deg 10' Maximum 0 deg 55' Left And Right Difference 45' or less Caster Minimum 2 deg 15' Degree Minute Nominal 3 deg 00' Maximum 3 deg 45' Left And Right Difference 45' or less Kingpin Inclination Minimum 13 deg 35' Degree Minute Nominal 14 deg 20' Maximum 15 deg 05' Total Toe-In Minimum 1 mm Distance (A - B) / Radial Tire Nominal 2 mm Maximum 3 mm Total Toe-In Minimum 5' Angle (Left Plus Right) / Degree Minute / Radial Tire Nominal 10' Maximum 15' Wheel Turning Angle Minimum 30 deg 00' Full Turn: On Power Steering Models, Wheel Turning Force Inside Degree Minute (At Circumference Of Steering Wheel) Of 98 To 147 N (10 To 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) With Engine Idle. Nominal 33 deg 00' Inside Degree Minute Maximum 34 deg 00' Inside Degree Minute Wheel Turning Angle Minimum 28 deg 00' Full Turn: On Power Steering Models, Wheel Turning Force Outside Degree Minute (At Circumference Of Steering Wheel) Of 98 To 147 N (10 To 15 kg, 22 to 33 lb) With Engine Idle. Nominal 31 deg 00' Outside Degree Minute Maximum 32 deg 00' Page 1015 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2340 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Changing Engine Oil WARNING: - Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. - Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 2. Stop engine and wait for more than 10 minutes. 3. Remove drain plug and oil filler cap. 4. Drain oil and refill with new engine oil. Oil specification and viscosity API grade SG or SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving - API Certification Mark - ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II - See "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS". CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug: Tightening Torque: 29 - 39 N.m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) - The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 5. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 6. Stop engine and wait for more than 10 minutes. 7. Check oil level. Page 4401 Description Part 1 Page 2406 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4972 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 3425 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 4301 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3919 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38 Page 5696 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3298 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3064 EC-MAFS-01 Connector Views Page 4422 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 2601 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. Page 1282 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 1418 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Tires: Customer Interest Body - Tire Dressing Stains Vehicle Paint Classification: WT04-010 Reference: NTB05-003 Date: January 12, 2005 NISSAN; INFORMATION ON PAINT STAINS CAUSED BY TIRE DRESSING APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2000 and later Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION An aftermarket chemical product called "tire dressing" is sometimes used on tires. When the tire dressing is applied, it may combine with an anti-ozonant compound (applied by tire manufacturers) to form a new compound that could stain vehicle paint. The paint stains occur if the wet tire dressing/anti-ozonant compound slings onto the vehicle paint when the vehicle is driven. Paint damage stains caused by application of the tire dressing are NOT covered by Nissan warranty. Therefore, Nissan does not recommend the application of tire dressing to vehicle tires. If a customer requests application of tire dressing to his/her vehicle, they should be informed that the vehicle paint may be stained if the tire dressing is applied to the tires and that Nissan warranty does not cover the repair of these stains. If the customer still requests the tire dressing be applied, consider the following: 1. Water based tire dressing may reduce the amount of anti-ozonant that will be mixed/dissolved in the tire dressing compared with oil based dressings. 2. A light coat of the tire dressing may reduce the amount of dressing that could enter the tires grooves/treads. 3. To reduce the amount of dressing that could stain the paint: Use a dry towel to wipe off excess tire dressing from the tire, including grooves and treads. Then allow the dressing to dry completely. Disclaimer Page 2644 Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling may occur with the standard type spark plug such as: - frequent engine starts - low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock may occur with the standard type spark plug such as: extended highway driving - frequent high engine revolution - Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. - If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/sq.cm, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds - Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. Page 3585 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2483 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3829 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3522 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3311 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the air duct housing. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 2086 Wheels: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Chassis and Body Maintenance WHEEL BALANCE Maximum allowable unbalance Dynamic (At rim flange) 10 g (0.35 oz) (one side) Static 20 g (0.71 oz) Runout Limits Wheel runout average = (outside runout value + inside runout value) x 0.5 Wheel Aluminum Radial Runout Limit 0.3 mm Lateral Runout Limit 0.3 mm Steel Radial Runout Limit 0.8 mm Lateral Runout Limit 0.8 mm Page 1431 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect battery ground cable and wait at least 3 minutes. - Always work from the side of air bag module. - Conduct self-diagnosis to ensure entire SRS operates properly. (Use CONSULT-II or warning lamp check.) Before performing self-diagnosis, connect both battery cables. Page 4567 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 734 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1220 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 2367 Oil Pressure Regulator Valve: Testing and Inspection REGULATOR VALVE INSPECTION 1. Visually inspect components for wear and damage. 2. Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and valve spring. 3. Coat regulator valve with engine oil. Check that it falls smoothly into the valve hole by its own weight. If damaged, replace regulator valve set or oil pump body. 4. Check regulator valve to oil pump body clearance. Clearance: 6: 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 inch) If it exceeds the limit, replace oil pump body. Page 4171 Part 1 Part 2 Page 1275 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3584 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 355 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2954 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 2485 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 2735 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 1409 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) is located on the engine front cover facing the camshaft sprocket. It detects the cylinder No. signal. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the camshaft sprocket will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder No. signal. Page 5532 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 4901 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4720 EC-O2H2B2-01 Page 2063 Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 21-26 Nm, 16-19 ft lb Page 2894 Locations Control Module HVAC: Locations Without Navigation System Locations Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 679 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3142 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 1164 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The vehicle speed sensor signal is sent from ABS actuator and electric unit to combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 4841 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 2797 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3504 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 752 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 3503 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5545 Throttle Body / Throttle Position Sensor Harness Connector / Throttle Position Switch Harness Connector Page 2190 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 25 10. Select the "Yes" button on the "Self Diagnosis" screen to begin program loading (see Figure 5). NOTE: Do not turn the power off or remove the CD-ROM during loading, as this will interrupt the loading process. 11. The loading process is complete when all the red lights (between "Start" and "End") are illuminated (see Figure 6) and when a "double-beep" sound is heard. This usually takes about three minutes. 12. After the "double beep" sound is heard, remove the CD-ROM from the navigation system CD slot, then insert the NEW mapping disc. Place the programming CD-ROM in its storage case. NOTE: After you insert the Mapping disc, the screen will show a specific street intersection. This street intersection is pre-determined by the Mapping disc and is used together with the satellite information to make corrections and determine your location. The table provides the pre-determined street intersection for each Map Coverage Area (MCA) for new "X5.1" mapping CDs. 13. Drive the vehicle for at least 20 to 30 minutes. This will allow GPS initialization. NOTE: GPS initialization is complete when the satellite icon, at the top left corner of the screen, turns green. 14. Leave the Mapping disc in the CD-ROM slot when you've completed the loading process. 15. Return the new programming CD-ROM to the Service Manager. NOTE: In some cases, the customer may provide your dealership (i.e., the Service Manager) with the new programming CD-ROM. In this case make sure the programming CD-ROM is returned to the customer. Page 816 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3922 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3835 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3086 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 427 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3768 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 216 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Page 3406 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation System Description Operation HO2S1 HEATER System Description Operation HO2S2 HEATER HO2S1 Page 198 Part 1 Page 732 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 2638 ^ It is not necessary to remove any coolant hoses or drain the coolant during ignition coil removal. 6. Replace the resistor assembly in all ignition coil tubes as follows: A. Pull the rubber boot away from the ignition coil. Then, twist and pull the ignition coil tube from the ignition coil to separate them (see Figure 7). B. Remove the old resistor assembly parts from the ignition coil tube and discard. Insert the new resistor assembly into the ignition coil tube in the order shown in Figure 8 shown. C. Assemble the ignition coil tube to the ignition coil. ^ Rotate the tube while pressing onto the coil. ^ A "pop" sound will be heard when the rubber boot is seated correctly to the ignition coil. Page 4614 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1759 Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Target idle speed*1 No-load*2 (in "P" or "N" position) M/T: 750 ± 50 rpm A/T: 750 ± 50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In "P" or "N" position 825 rpm or more Ignition timing*1 In "P" or "N" position 15 deg ± 5 deg BTDC *1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected *2: Under the following conditions: - Air conditioner switch: OFF - Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) - Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Page 203 Part 6 Page 139 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 4703 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 2716 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1738 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Page 3637 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4950 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5734 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Locations Fuse Block: Locations Overall View Component View A Page 4041 Step 25 - 27 Garage Jack and Safety Stand Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. Page 1361 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1109 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1508 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1261 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3286 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1482 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 2933 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1310 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5517 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3240 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Electric Load Sensor: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Specifications Valve Spring: Specifications Valve spring Free height 47.10 mm Pressure at height Standard 202 N at 37.0 mm Limit 436 N at 28.2 mm Out-of-square Less than 2.0 mm Page 3579 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 5785 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3229 Step 4 - 7 Page 633 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 486 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1764 Step 1 - 2 Page 3580 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5146 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4864 Part 4 Page 4243 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3198 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5548 Description Part 1 Page 5027 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 573 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 3841 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 600 Part 1 Part 2 Page 183 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4956 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 5703 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Diagrams EC-IVC-R-01 Page 4143 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1236 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3345 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 774 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1071 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 417 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1115 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2400 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 5478 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3043 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4793 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4466 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 4206 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3162 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 479 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3981 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Check - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. - Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. 2. Disconnect fuel tube joint between fuel damper and injector tube and set fuel pressure check adapter (J44321). 3. Install pressure gauge to the fuel pressure check adapter as shown in the figure. 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. At idling: With vacuum hose connected Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/sq.cm, 34 psi) With vacuum hose disconnected Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/sq.cm, 43 psi) If results are unsatisfactory perform Fuel Pressure Regulator Check. Page 3549 Part 1 Part 2 Page 2413 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Power Steering Pressure Switch: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 3577 Description Part 1 Page 1564 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications At idle Vaccuum hose connected 235 Kpa (2.4 kg/sq.cm 34 psi Vacuum hose disconnected 294 Kpa (3.0 kg/sq.cm 43 psi Page 424 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1200 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 276 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine oil pressure Engine speed Approximate discharge pressure Idle speed More than 98 kPa 2000 rpm 294 kPa Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5501 EC-VSS-01 Connector Views Page 5344 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 3093 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 3824 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 433 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 5038 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4891 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4488 Description Part 1 Page 5802 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 3928 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3280 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4782 Page 5306 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 4141 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 3156 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5719 Type Of Standardized Relays Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5558 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 5616 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Locations Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations Component Locations Overall view Component View E Page 786 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 3074 Description Part 1 Page 3629 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 574 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 2813 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1153 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4498 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 519 7. To install reverse the removal procedure. Connect the quick connectors as follows. - Be sure that the connecting portion is clean and smooth. - Align mating marks. - Insert tube into the center of the connector until you hear a click. After connecting quick connectors make sure the connection is firmly made using the following method. - Pull on the fuel tube and connector to make sure they are firmly connected. - Start the engine increase engine speed and verify that there are no leaks. - Install fuel level sensor unit as shown. Page 1983 Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. Amount of lubricant to be added Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect ACR4 to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT". 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using ACR4 and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT". 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/ recycling equipment. 5. Remove the drain plug of the "old" (removed) compressor. Drain the lubricant into a graduated container and record the amount of drained lubricant. 6. Remove the drain plug and drain the lubricant from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. Torque the drain plug. 18 - 19 N.m (1.8 - 1.9 kg-m, 13 - 14 ft-lb) 10. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl.oz, 0.2 Imp fl.oz) of lubricant at this time. Page 4447 Page 2506 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 917 EC-O2S1B1-01 Page 3404 EC-O2S2B1-01 Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1459 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2694 Page 597 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4333 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1341 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1014 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 3402 EC-O2S1B1-01 Page 1924 Disclaimer Page 3247 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5017 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4264 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1677 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 5233 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1140 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1094 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 4272 EC-ECTS-01 Connector Views Page 3725 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 4415 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 4816 ECM / ECM Harness Connector Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 3400 EC-O2H2B1-01 Page 4736 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4734 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 1254 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 4256 Part 1 Page 3561 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5160 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Page 4282 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5642 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1760 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection IDLE SPEED - Using CONSULT-II Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II. Page 4404 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2308 Valve: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Head Assembly; Service and Repair. Page 921 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation System Description Operation HO2S1 HEATER System Description Operation HO2S2 HEATER HO2S1 Page 4170 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 1972 2. When testing, circle each fitting completely with probe. 3. Move probe along component approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in)/sec. CHECKING PROCEDURE To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn engine off. 2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service ports. 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above 16 °C (61 °F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. NOTE: At temperatures below 16 °C (61 °F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi). 4. Conduct the leak test from the high side (compressor discharge a to evaporator inlet f) to the low side (evaporator drain hose g to shaft seal k). Perform a leak check for the following areas carefully. Clean the component to be checked and move the leak detector probe completely around the connection/component. - Compressor Check the fitting of high and low pressure hoses, relief valve and shaft seal. - Liquid tank Check the tube fitting. - Service valves Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from valves to prevent any false readings by leak detector. - Cooling unit (Evaporator) With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturers recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose. Keep the probe inserted for at least ten seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. 5. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected leak, then repeat check as outlined above. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components. If no leaks are found, perform steps 7 - 10. 7. Start engine. 8. Set the heater A/C control as follows: Page 5575 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4642 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5304 Step 7 - 8 Page 186 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2920 Page 709 Description Part 1 Page 5129 Front Bumper LH Side / Intake Air Temperature Sensor Harness Connector Page 3471 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 378 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 1693 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 00-037B Date: 010614 Steering - Pull/Drift Classification: FA00-001b Reference: NTB00-037b Date: June 14, 2001 STEERING PULL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR (REVISED) ATTENTION: This bulletin has been revised. Page 4650 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5238 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 4902 Part 1 Page 3325 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 3965 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 3245 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4252 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3077 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4969 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 5244 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 2433 16. Remove lower intake manifold collector in reverse order of installation. 17. Disconnect injector harness connectors. 18. Remove fuel tube assembly in reverse order of installation. 19. Remove ignition coils. 20. Remove RH and LH rocker covers from cylinder head. 21. Set No. 1 piston at TDC on the compression stroke by rotating crankshaft. - Align pointer with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. Page 32 Submit a Primary Operation (P0) line claim using the claims coding shown. Service Procedure Navigation Operating System Software Upgrade Installation Procedure IMPORTANT NOTES: ^ Handle the Program CD-ROM by the edges only. Protect the surface from dirt, grease and scratches as this type of foreign material can prevent the navigation system from accessing the data on the CD-ROM. ^ After new software is loaded, the distance on the navigation system map may not match the actual miles driven. To correct this condition, advise the customer to drive the vehicle, with all car phones, cell phones, beepers. etc. turned off, at a speed greater than 19 MPH (30 km/h) for at least 20 to 30 minutes. This will automatically re-calibrate the navigation system. 1. Confirm which navigation system software version the vehicle is equipped with using the "Check the Map CD-ROM Version" procedure contained on the following 2001 model year Service Manual pages: EL-368 for Pathfinder and EL-373 for Maxima. A. If the vehicle is already equipped with the latest software upgrade (i.e WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33]), stop the process. B. If the vehicle is not equipped with the latest software upgrade (i.e., WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33]), install the latest software upgrade by proceeding with step 2 below. 2. Obtain the new 0/S programming CD-ROM from the Service Manager. 3. Park the vehicle on a level surface and firmly apply the parking brake. 4. Start the engine and let it run. 5. Press the "OPEN" button on the navigation system, then gently move the display downward to the locked position (see Figure 2). 6. Remove the customer's map disc from the navigation system. Store the disc carefully. Page 5791 Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. Page 3819 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2217 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Views EC-IVC-R-01 Connector Views EC-IVC-L-01 Connector Views Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio Coolant: Service and Repair Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine Nissan anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/ distilled water. Other types of coolant solutions may damage your engine cooling system. Page 691 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 4839 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 2226 11. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep throttle valve wide open. 12. Crank engine and record highest gauge indication. 13. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder as shown above. Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 14. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through spark plug holes. b. Retest compression. ^ If adding oil helps compression, piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. ^ If pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or seating improperly. Inspect and repair valve and valve seat. If valve or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace them. ^ If compression stays low in two cylinders that are next to each other: a. The cylinder head gasket may be leaking, or b. Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 15. Install parts in reverse order of removal. 16. Perform "Self-diagnosis Procedure" if any DTC appears. Refer to Powertrain Management; Computers and Control Systems. Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set Classification: EM06-005a Reference: NTB06-079a Date: January 24, 2008 DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other changes have been made. Please discard any other copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20 IF YOU CONFIRM: The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored: ^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135, NOTE: The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise. ACTION Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual. The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the: ^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level diagnoses if needed. ^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed. Disclaimer Page 5461 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 3755 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 2087 Wheels: Adjustments Balancing Wheels Adjust wheel balance using the road wheel center. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance): Refer to SDS. Page 1739 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Page 3036 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3732 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air the greater the heat loss. Therefore the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 5476 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5481 Part 1 Part 2 Page 689 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Page 3762 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1392 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 1451 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate (flywheel). It detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the gear teeth (cogs) will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the crankshaft position signal (1° signal). CKP SENSOR Component Description The crankshaft position sensor (REF) is located on the oil pan (upper) facing the crankshaft pulley. It detects the TDC (Top Dead Center) signal (120° signal). The sensor consists of a permanent magnet core and coil. When engine is running the gap between the sensor and the crankshaft pulley will periodically change. Permeability near the sensor also changes. Due to the permeability change the magnetic flux near the core is changed. Therefore the voltage signal generated in the coil is changed. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the TDC signal (120° signal). Page 1600 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove A/T assembly. 2. Remove turbine revolution sensor from A/T assembly upper side. 3. Reinstall any part removed. - Always use new sealing parts. Page 437 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Page 1971 Refrigerant: Service and Repair NOTE: This information is also applicable for Manual A/C. Checking for Refrigerant Leaks PRELIMINARY CHECK - Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent dye leak detector. - If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was repaired and not properly cleaned. - When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. - When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 to 50 mm (1 to 2 in) per second and no further than 1/4 inch from the component. NOTE: Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a J-41995 A/C leak detector or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and set properly per the operating instructions. The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. - Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. - Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. 1. Position probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from point to be checked. Page 1204 Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board diagnosis. Page 3252 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 653 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Diagram Information and Instructions Electric Load Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4172 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5774 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Diagram Information and Instructions Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Locations Control Module: Locations Overall View Component View B Page 3730 EC-MAFS-01 Connector Views Page 265 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Power Steering Pressure Switch: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 484 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON". 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF". WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. Page 3935 EC-REF-01 Page 2459 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 766 Part 1 Page 1778 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 2146 Page 24 7. Insert the Program CD-ROM (label-side up) into the CD slot (see Figure 3). 8. Gently move the display upward to close it. 9. Use the up/down arrow to choose the latest program CD-ROM upgrade number (WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33J), then touch this number (on the screen) to select it. See Figure 4. Page 3092 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4412 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3267 Fuel Level Sensor: Connector Views EC-FLS1-01 Connector Views EC-FLS2-01 Connector Views EC-FLS3-01 Connector Views Page 5164 EC-IATS-01 Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Replacement CAUTION: When removing the oil pans, oil pump assembly and timing chain from engine, first remove the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), intake valve timing control position sensor and the crankshaft position sensors (REF)/(POS) from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edges. OIL SEAL INSTALLATION DIRECTION ^ Install new oil seal in the direction shown in the figure. FRONT OIL SEAL 1. Remove the following parts: ^ Engine undercover ^ Suspension member stay ^ Drive belts ^ Crankshaft position sensor (REF) Be careful not to damage sensor edge. ^ Crankshaft pulley ^ Rad later ^ Cooling fan 2. Remove front oil seal using a suitable tool. Be careful not to scratch front cover. 3. Apply engine oil to new oil seal and install it using a suitable tool. Page 2174 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable and fuel lines. Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Throttle Position Sensor Throttle valve conditions Voltage (at normal operating temperature, engine off, ignition switch ON, throttle opener disengaged) Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85 V Partially open Between (a) and (b) Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 V Page 2191 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4635 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 4768 Step 4 - 6 Page 4479 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 579 EC-MAFS-01 Connector Views Page 1397 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Page 1941 Fluid - Differential: Testing and Inspection Limited-Slip Differential Gear - Use only approved limited-slip differential gear oil. - Limited-slip differential identification. 1. Lift both rear wheels off the ground. 2. Turn one rear wheel by hand. 3. If both rear wheels turn in the same direction simultaneously, vehicle is equipped with limited-slip differential. Page 3661 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4028 Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Target idle speed*1 No-load*2 (in "P" or "N" position) M/T: 750 ± 50 rpm A/T: 750 ± 50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In "P" or "N" position 825 rpm or more Ignition timing*1 In "P" or "N" position 15 deg ± 5 deg BTDC *1: Throttle position sensor harness connector connected *2: Under the following conditions: - Air conditioner switch: OFF - Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger) - Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Page 3831 Part 1 Page 3436 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Diagram Information and Instructions Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 5601 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 476 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 2805 Part 1 Page 3223 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 951 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 1659 The vehicle has a tendency to drift to the right or left depending on road surface conditions. Wander can occur as a result of too little caster (incorrect wheel alignment), steering rack Sliding Force setting or incorrect road wheel offset. See figure 3 Pull When Braking The vehicle consistently drifts to one side when the brakes are applied. This condition can occur as a result of excessive play in suspension bushings or components, or because of uneven braking force. CLAIMS INFORMATION Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations performed. Service Procedure 1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer using the Steering Pull Diagnosis and Repair procedure below. 2. Determine the specific pull condition based on the descriptions in the service information section of this bulletin. 3. Perform the Preliminary Inspection outlined in this section of the bulletin. 4. Follow the appropriate repair procedure outlined in this section of the bulletin. Preliminary Steps Always perform these preliminary steps before performing the other listed diagnosis and repair procedures. 1. Check and adjust tire pressure. A pressure difference of 3 psi or more from one side of the car to the other can cause the vehicle to drift toward the side with the lower pressure. 2. Determine if the wheels and tires are the same as the wheels and tires that were originally supplied on the vehicle. 3. Visually inspect the vehicle for unusual load conditions. Remove unusual loads before road testing. 4. Visually inspect the tires for wear and condition. Replace tires that show damage or have excessive or uneven wear. 5. If corrections are made to the tire pressure, vehicle load condition or tire condition, road test the vehicle again to determine if the incident continues to occur. If so, refer to the appropriate diagnosis and repair information below. Steering Pull Diagnosis And Repair 1. Confirm the direction of pull with a road test. 2. Remove the front wheels and exchange them left to right and right to left. Page 702 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Electrical Diagrams EC-POS-01 Page 1621 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 4178 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2457 Description Part 1 Page 2522 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 693 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 5187 Part 1 Page 2073 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 3124 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4192 EC-IATS-01 Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Page 211 Part 4 Checking A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Checking A/T Fluid Checking A/T Fluid 1. Warm up engine. 2. Check for fluid leakage. 3. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using "COLD" range on dipstick. a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in "P" position. c. Check fluid level with engine idling. d. Remove dipstick and note reading. If level is at low side of either range, and fluid to the charging pipe. e. Re-insert dipstick into charging pipe as far as it will go. f. Remove dipstick and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the charging pipe. Do not overfill. 4. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. 5. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) using "HOT" range on dipstick. CAUTION: Securely install A/T fluid level gauge. 6. Check fluid condition. - If fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to checking operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of A/T. - If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to "Radiator". Page 1686 3. Loosen the tie-rod lock nuts and rotate the left and right tie-rods an equal amount in opposite directions. This will center the steering wheel. If the steering wheel off-center increases, reverse the direction you are turning the tie rods. 4. Use the alignment equipment to verify and adjust the toe-in. 5. Verify the steering wheel is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is centered and the toe-in is correct, the procedure is complete. ^ If the steering wheel is still off-center or the toe-in is incorrect, repeat steps 2, 3, 4, 5. Steering Wander Diagnosis And Repair 1. Determine if the vehicle is equipped with the tires and wheels originally supplied on the vehicle. ^ If the tires and wheels are original go to step 3. ^ If the vehicle has aftermarket wheels or Nissan wheels that are different from those specified for the vehicle, go to step 2. 2. Temporarily exchange the wheels and tires for wheels and tires of the same type and size that were originally specified for the vehicle. Road test the vehicle to determine if the wander condition still occurs. ^ If the wander condition is eliminated by this test, advise the customer that the wander is a result of the incorrect wheel assemblies. It will be necessary to replace them with the correct wheels to eliminate the wander condition. ^ If the wander occurs during this test, reinstall the customer's wheels and continue with step 3. 3. Check the vehicle's wheel alignment using accurate and properly calibrated alignment equipment. Adjust toe-in to specification. Determine if the caster setting is in the correct range and is equal from side to side, then refer to the vehicle information below. Passenger Cars Quest and 1996-later Pathfinders ^ If the caster setting is correct perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement procedure below. ^ If the caster setting is not correct determine the cause and repair as necessary. Frontier/Xterra/Truck 1995 and earlier Pathfinder ^ Adjust the caster setting equally on both sides of the vehicle to the high end of the specified range. Steering Rack Sliding Force Measurement Procedure 1. Disconnect tie-rod ends from the left and right steering knuckles using J-24319-B. 2. Start the engine and warm it to operating temperature. 3. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock several times to circulate the fluid then return the steering wheel to the center position. 4. Pathfinder (R50) only: Disconnect the steering column lower shaft from the rack pinion. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel after the steering column lower shaft is disconnected as this will put the steering column lower shaft and rack pinion out of phase. Page 3714 Part 1 Page 3645 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4871 4. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to Basic Inspection.) See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection (Basic Inspection) 5. When the above four items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem. It is useful to perform "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALVE". 6. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the problem and perform "Idle air volume learning" all over again: Engine stalls. - Erroneous idle. - Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system. Page 4718 EC-O2H1B2-01 Page 2133 Wheel Hub: Service and Repair Wheel Hub and Rotor Disc COMPONENTS 2WD Model 4WD Model REMOVAL CAUTION: Before removing the front axle assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensor from the assembly. Then move it away from the front axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensor becoming inoperative. Page 5471 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1269 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5771 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 2796 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3202 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 954 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 1669 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 4046 7. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 8. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "INCMP" is displayed, "Idle Air Volume Learning" will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. 7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown), then reconnect it within 5 seconds. 8. Wait 20 seconds. 9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the problem by referring to the NOTE below. 10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within specifications. NOTE: If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. Page 1525 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1376 Description Part 1 Page 4385 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5513 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 4271 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 1038 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 999 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2910 Page 2579 Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: After completing repairs in this procedure, make sure any stored DTCs are erased. 1. Make sure there are no engine vacuum leaks. Repair any vacuum leaks that are found. Make sure to check: ^ Hoses ^ Intake Manifold ^ Ducting between Intake Manifold and MAFS 2. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure as follows. NOTE: The IAVL procedure will normally complete within 2 minutes after Procedure Start. A. Make sure all DTCs are cleared (erased). B. Use CONSULT-II to confirm / perform the following Pre-Conditions: Page 3241 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 22 Navigation Operating System Software Upgrade Information ^ The Program CD-ROM (see Figure 1) containing the latest navigation operating system software upgrade was sent to all Nissan dealer Service Managers on: September 4, 2001. ^ This latest software upgrade (WXC42031 [R50] / WXC32031 [A33] / WXC22031 [R50]) supercedes all previous upgrades. Please discard all previous software upgrade CDROMS. ^ The table (titled: "Navigation Program CD-ROM Upgrade Release Information") provides detailed information for all Program CD-ROM upgrade releases to date. Navigation Program CD-ROM Upgrade Release Information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Questions or Concerns If you have additional questions or concerns, call Nissan Consumer Affairs at 1-800-NISSAN-1 and press the prompt for the Nissan Navigation System Help Desk. Ordering Additional Materials Additional copies of the item listed below can be ordered from Dyment Distribution Services at 1-800-247-5321. ^ Quick Reference Guide CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 4375 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 3249 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3498 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2800 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 4517 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 4985 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3720 2. Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) 3. Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. 4. Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) 5. Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point B) 6. Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition, (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. Voltage Check Method To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. 1. Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. 2. Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. 3. With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). 4. Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). 5. Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the above example. TESTING FOR "SHORTS" IN THE CIRCUIT To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system please refer to the schematic. Resistance Check Method 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. 2. Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 3. Connect one probe of the ohmmeter to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. 4. With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 5. Close SW1 and disconnect the relay Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: ^ Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation. ^ If master cylinder is suspected to have air inside, bleed air from master cylinder first. ^ Fill reservoir with new brake fluid "DOT 3". Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system. ^ Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid. ^ Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit connectors or battery ground cable. ^ Bleed air in the following order. 1. LSV air bleeder (4WD) 2. Left rear brake 3. Right rear brake 4. Left front brake 5. Right front brake 1. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 2. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 3. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 4. Close air bleeder valve. 5. Release brake pedal slowly. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until clear brake fluid comes out of air bleeder valve. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve. 7 - 9 Nm (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 inch lbs.) Page 3055 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 5822 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications Gap (Nominal): .................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) Spark plug Torque: ...................................................................................................................................... 19.6 - 29.4 Nm (2.0 - 2.9 kg-m, 15 - 22 ft. lbs.) Page 5175 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 606 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1340 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1020 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3392 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3101 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2344 Oil Cooler: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION Oil Cooler 1. Check oil cooler for cracks. 2. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly. Oil Pressure Relief Valve Inspect oil pressure relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it. Page 5841 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2562 NOTE: The IAVL procedure will self-cancel if any of the following Pre-Conditions are not met and maintained for as long as the procedure is running. C. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. D. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. E. Using CONSULT-II, select [WORK SUPPORT] > [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. F. Touch [START] and wait 20 seconds to 2 minutes. ^ If "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen; go to C, next step. ^ If "INCMP" is displayed within 2 minutes, or test is not finished within 2 minutes, "Idle Air Volume Learning" was not carried out successfully; go to step H. C. Rev up the engine two or three times, then let the engine idle. Verify the idle speed is within specifications. Refer to the EC section of the appropriate Service Manual for specifications. If OK, procedure ends here. If not, go to step H. H. If IAVL did not complete and you're sure you: ^ Set all of the preconditions exactly as shown in the chart above, and ^ Performed steps A through F exactly as shown above. Go to step 3. NOTE: Step 3 below covers 2002 and 2003 vehicles only. For 2004 and 2005 vehicles; skip to step 4. ^ For 2004 and 2005 model years, ECM reprogramming will not clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. Reprogramming won't reduce the idle speed. 3. For 2002 - 2003 vehicles; you may be able to reduce the engine idle speed by performing ECM reprogramming. Reprogramming may clear the vehicle "in-use" learned IAVL. A. With the ignition ON and CONSULT-II connected to the vehicle, print your current ECM Part Number (P/N) as follows: [START Nissan] >> [ENGINE] >> [ECM PART NUMBER] >> [COPY] Specifications Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications Lifter, valve Valve lifter outer diameter 33.977 - 33.987 mm Lifter guide inner diameter 34.000 - 34.016 mm Clearance between lifter and lifter guide 0.013 - 0.039 mm Page 754 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 411 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3589 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5378 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4293 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1162 EC-VSS-01 Connector Views Page 3432 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Electric Load Sensor: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Step 1 - 3 Page 272 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 1210 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g.m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g.m/sec at 2,500 rpm* *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 5107 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up General Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main bearing clearance Standard 0.035 - 0.045 mm Limit 0.065 mm Page 3663 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 612 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3700 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1137 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5812 Part 1 Page 3995 Step 28 - 30 Page 5364 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Page 3350 EC-KS-01 Page 5020 Part 1 Part 2 Page 495 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2523 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3391 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 365 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Diagram Information and Instructions Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 2421 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description Intake valve advance unit position sensors are located in the front cylinder heads in both bank 1 and bank 2. This sensor uses a Hall IC (element). The cam position is determined by the intake primary cam sprocket concave (in three places). The ECM provides feedback to the intake valve timing control for appropriate target valve open-close timing according to drive conditions based on detected cam position. Page 5552 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Close Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 1322 EC-TP/SW-01 Connector Views Page 1103 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4810 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 1244 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4189 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3771 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 4778 Page 4209 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 4327 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5807 LG = Light Green BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green Page 2964 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 271 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1561 Description Part 1 Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Engine oil pressure Engine speed Approximate discharge pressure Idle speed More than 98 kPa 2000 rpm 294 kPa Page 3861 Description Part 1 Page 2050 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 5398 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 672 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Page 2563 B. Go to ASIST: Select CONSULT Utilities > ECM/TCM Data. Then choose Model and Model Year of the vehicle you're working on (see Figure 1). C. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then make sure that your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, - XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). ^ If your current ECM P/N is listed in the "Details" panel, you can perform a reprogramming using the latest (newer) data update, then go to D. ^ If your current ECM P/N is not listed in the "Details" panel, new ECM data is not available for your vehicle, go to step 4. D. After following all steps of the reprogramming procedure, perform IAVL again (back to step 2) ^ If the IAVL procedure now completes, the incident is fixed and you're done. ^ If the IAVL procedure still does not complete, go to step 4. 4. Reduce the engine idle speed manually and perform IAVL as follows: A. With the engine running, disconnect 1 fuel injector (engine rpm should drop, MIL may come ON). CAUTION: Do Not disconnect the ignition (coils or spark plugs) for this step. Disconnecting the ignition while the engine is running may cause damage to the catalysts. B. With the injector(s) disconnected and the engine running, perform IAVL (step 2). Locations Fuel Tank Gauge Unit Page 4129 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 4377 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 5676 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Page 5674 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 5829 EC-VENT/V-01 Page 55 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation CONTROL UNIT (BUILT-IN ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT) The control unit computes the wheel rotating speed by the signal current sent from the sensor. Then it supplies a DC current to the actuator solenoid valve. It also controls ON-OFF operation of the valve relay and motor relay. If any electrical malfunction should be detected in the system, the control unit causes the warning lamp to light up. In this condition, the ABS will be deactivated by the control unit, and the vehicle's brake system reverts to normal operation. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT The ABS actuator and electric unit contains: ^ An electric motor and pump ^ Two relays ^ Six solenoid valves, each inlet and outlet for LH front - RH front - Rear ^ ABS control unit This component controls the hydraulic circuit and increases, holds or decreases hydraulic pressure to all or individual wheels. The ABS actuator and electric unit is serviced as an assembly. ABS Actuator Operation Page 936 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3170 Part 1 Page 3633 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 1429 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5110 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 3295 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 4707 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 4998 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 4572 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 5769 Part 1 Part 2 Page 4848 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 863 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Page 4706 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1545 ECM Terminals And Reference Value Page 1776 Idle Speed: Adjustments Perform If Idle Is Out of Specification Idle Air Volume Learning DESCRIPTION "Idle Air Volume Learning" is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the given conditions: - Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced. - Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PRE-CONDITIONING Before performing "Idle Air Volume Learning", make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. - Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) - Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99 °C (158 - 210 °F) - PNP switch: ON - Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light Systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the headlamp will not illuminate. - Cooling fan motor: Not operating - Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) - Vehicle speed: Stopped - Transmission: Warmed-up For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until "FLUID TEMP SE" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T" system indicates less than 0.9 V. For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch "ON" and wait at least 1 second. 2. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic "PRE-CONDITIONING" (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 30 seconds. Page 5228 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 1588 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2399 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 1399 Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with ohmmeter, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: - Undersized wiring (single strand example) - Corrosion on switch contacts - Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. Measuring Voltage Drop - Accumulated Method 1. Connect the voltmeter across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the voltmeter should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. 2. Operate the circuit. 3. The voltmeter will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the circuit. Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. Measuring Voltage Drop - Step by Step Page 3422 Wire Color Code Identification Wiring Color Code B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow Page 3080 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 3271 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the ECM. It consists of two parts one is mechanical float and the other side is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. Page 1576 Part 1 Page 1222 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 916 EC-O2H2B2-01 Page 4101 Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve slearance Intake Cold 0.26 - 0.34 mm Hot (reference data) 0.304 - 0.416 mm Approximately 80 deg C Exhaust Cold 0.29 - 0.37 mm Hot (reference data) 0.308 - 0.432 mm Page 3206 Electric Load Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Specifications Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature deg C (deg F) Resistance kOhm 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 Page 4601 to "CONNECTOR SYMBOLS" and "Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures". 4. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. Harness Wire Color and Connector Number Indication There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. TYPE 1: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. - Connector numbers in a double circle (e.g. F211) indicate component connectors. Exhaust System - Front Exhaust Tubes Leaking/Noisy Technical Service Bulletin # 04-092 Date: 040901 Exhaust System - Front Exhaust Tubes Leaking/Noisy Classification: FE04-002 Reference: NTB04-092 Date: September 1, 2004 REPAIR OF EXHAUST LEAK/NOISE AT FRONT TUBE APPLIED VEHICLE: 2002-03 Pathfinder (R50) IF YOU CONFIRM: The vehicle has an exhaust leak or noise coming from the Front Tube(s). NOTE: The Front Tubes may look like catalysts, but they are (by design) NOT catalysts. ACTION: ^ Inspect both Front Tubes for cracking at the welded side seams. ^ If needed, repair the Front Tube(s) by installing Front Tube Repair Kit # 20711-5W90A. PARTS INFORMATION Page 5568 ELECTRICAL LOAD The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. COLD OR HOT START UP On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold. Or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Circuit Inspection INTRODUCTION In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. NOTE: Refer to "HOW TO CHECK TERMINAL" to probe or check terminal. TESTING FOR "OPENS" IN THE CIRCUIT Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. Continuity Check Method The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The Digital Multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (OL, no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the schematic above. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Page 4537 Part 8 Page 2731 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 4863 Part 3 Page 4952 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 1149 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4388 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 1247 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air the greater the heat loss. Therefore the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 595 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5749 2WD Model Removal and Installation CAUTION: - Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. - With engine running, check all tube connections for exhaust gas leaks, and entire system for unusual noises. - Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise or vibration. - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Page 2043 Locations Intake Manifold Collector / Engine Front / ETCS Harness Connector Page 1509 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4883 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Mechanical Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g.m/sec at idle* 7.0 - 20.0 g.m/sec at 2,500 rpm* *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load. Page 1131 Description Part 1 Page 3713 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 1819 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Changing Spark Plugs 1. Remove engine cover. 2. Remove throttle wires. 3. Remove air duct with air cleaner assembly. 4. Disconnect harness connectors and harness brackets around ignition coil sides. 5. Remove throttle body. (Only when removing the No. 4 cylinder spark plug) 6. Disconnect ignition coil harness connectors. 7. Loosen ignition coil fixing bolts and pull out coil from intake manifold connector. Ignition coil: Tightening Torque: 8.5 - 10.7 N.m (0.86 - 1.1 kg-m, 75 - 95 in-lb) 8. Check type and gap of new spark plug. Spark plug type (Platinum-tipped type): Gap (Nominal): 1.1 mm (0.043 in) Spark plug: Tightening Torque: 20 - 29 N.m (2.0 - 3.0 kg-m, 14-22 ft-lb) Page 1687 5. Connect a spring scale to one tie-rod (see Figure 4). 6. With the engine idling and the steering centered, slowly pull the spring scale until the tie-rod begins to move. Pull slowly at a rate of 3.5 mm per second (0.138 in/sec). 7. Read the value on the spring scale after the tie-rod begins to move. Repeat steps 5 and 6 two or three times from the left and right side of the vehicle. Be sure to center the steering wheel each time. Write down the value each time. 8. Take an average value from step 6 and compare it to the specifications. If the measured value is below or at the low end of the specified value, perform the Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment procedure (below). Steering Rack Sliding Force Adjustment Procedure 1. Loosen the steering rack sliding force adjusting screw lock nut while holding the sliding force adjusting screw (see Figure 5). Page 255 SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the normal condition. A vehicle is in the normal condition when: - ignition switch is OFF, - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. DETECTABLE LINES AND NON-DETECTABLE LINES In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. - A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM (Engine Control Module) can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 151 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 4042 Step 28 - 30 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 1243 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. - If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION - Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. - The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Page 3209 Part 1 Page 1221 CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. Normal Open, Normal Closed And Mixed Type Relays Page 608 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 146 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 366 Part 1 Page 5566 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 2502 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 501 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM and ECM controls cooling fan system. Page 858 System Description: When the switch is ON, the control unit fights up the lamp CONSULT-II Checking System Function And System Application Function and system Application Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble of dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Page 312 Component View E Component View F Page 4437 Step 8 - 10 Page 5001 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Reference Data Component Description The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Page 5024 Part 1 Page 2074 Tires: Adjustments Tire Rotation - After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. - Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for the 1,000 km (600 miles), (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.) Wheel nuts: Torque Specifications: 118 - 147 N-m (12 - 15 kg-m, 87 - 108 ft-lb) Locations Heated Mirror Relay: Locations Door Mirror Defogger Relay Overall View Component View K Page 833 Description Part 1 Page 3320 - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. HARNESS INDICATION - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. COMPONENT INDICATION - Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Service and Repair Fluid Filter - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Oil Filter REMOVAL - Remove bolts to detach oil filter. - When removing oil filter from transfer, avoid damaging it. - Be sure to loosen bolts evenly. - When removing oil filter, be sure to replace O-ring with new one. INSTALLATION 1. Apply petroleum jelly or ATF to O-ring. 2. Tighten bolts evenly to install oil filter. 7 - 9 Nm (0.7 - 0.9 kg.m, 61 - 78 inch lbs.) Be sure not to damage oil filter. Page 308 Engine Compartment Locations Component Overall view Locations Tail Lamp Relay: Locations Headlamp Relay/Tail Lamp Relay Page 5574 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 899 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1272 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Changing Air Cleaner Filter VISCOUS PAPER TYPE The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Diagram Information and Instructions Cranking Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 601 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5512 MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. How to Read Harness Layout The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: - Main Harness - Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment) - Engine Control Harness TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. Page 5256 EC-O2S1B1-01 Page 5416 The step by step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in "Computer Controlled Systems"). Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. Case 1 Case 2 CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST Page 3403 EC-O2S1B2-01 Page 5410 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 1005 Throttle Full Close Switch: Description and Operation Component Description A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open throttle position switch is used only for All control. When the throttle valve is in the closed position the closed throttle position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning. Page 4770 Consult-II Reference Value In Data Monitor Mode Page 1648 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 282 Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. Page 2912 Page 2543 Step 7 - 10 Page 5112 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 4530 Part 1 Page 2685 Coolant: Service and Repair Draining Engine Coolant Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Set air conditioning system as follows to prevent coolant from remaining in the system. a. Turn ignition switch "ON" and set temperature controller to maximum hot position. b. Wait 10 seconds before turning ignition switch "OFF". 2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator. 3. Remove radiator filler cap. - Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts. Page 2544 Step 11 - 13 Page 661 EC-ECTS-01 Page 3662 CAUTION: Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector. HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) - A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. Page 5640 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 1331 Description Part 1 Page 1384 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5101 Part 1 Part 2 Page 3523 Checking Equipment CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit Inspection Procedure How to Check Terminals Page 3649 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The vehicle speed sensor signal is sent from ABS actuator and electric unit to combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM. Page 3237 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 2817 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 3711 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer Page 5154 6. Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. Voltage Check Method 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the B + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the B (+) terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). 3. With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. 4. With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. 5. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. GROUND INSPECTION Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: 1. Remove the ground bolt or screw. 2. Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. 3. Clean as required to assure good contact. 4. Reinstall bolt or screw securely. 5. Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. 6. If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. VOLTAGE DROP TESTS Page 1377 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 1111 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 5759 Description Part 2 Description CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. - Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Page 356 Connector Symbol Harness Connector Descriptions Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector. Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Level Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Read Wiring Diagrams HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Page 4390 Connector and Terminal Pin Kit Use the connector and terminal pin kit listed above when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kit contains some of the most commonly used NISSAN connectors and terminals. How to Probe Connectors Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the "T" pin using an alligator clip. PROBING FROM HARNESS SIDE Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin. - If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. - Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. PROBING FROM TERMINAL SIDE Female Terminal - There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. Page 2468 Part 1 Part 2 Page 5406 TYPE 2: HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER ARE SHOWN IN TEXT Page 2476 HEAT SENSITIVE The owner's problem may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140° F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. FREEZING The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. WATER INTRUSION The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. Page 1804 D. Remove the 10mm bolt holding the metal EVAP purge pipe to the intake collector. Remove the four throttle chamber bolts (6mm socket head capscrews) - see Figure 4. E. Remove the throttle chamber gasket and discard (see Figure 5). CAUTION: DO NOT allow anything to fall into the intake manifold or intake tube. F. Remove all ignition coils by disconnecting each coil harness connector and removing the screw, holding each coil to the engine. Notes: ^ The harness of each ignition coil is numbered (1 through 6) near the connector to assist in proper re-installation. ^ You must lift the throttle chamber slightly to reach the # 4 ignition coil (see Figure 6). Page 4750 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 556 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 3090 Part 2 Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident Page 5805 Type Of Standardized Relays Page 5037 - Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. Male Terminal Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal. How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Hub: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 5108 Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. VEHICLE VIBRATION The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the illustration below. Connectors & Harness Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. Hint Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. Sensors & Relays Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay Engine Compartment There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: - Connectors not fully seated. - Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. - Wires laying across brackets or moving components. - Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. - Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to GROUND INSPECTION described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. Behind The Instrument Panel An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. Under Seating Areas An undamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or pinching. Page 4648 Work Flow Incident Simulation Tests INTRODUCTION Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: - Vehicle vibration - Heat sensitive - Freezing - Water intrusion - Electrical load - Cold or hot start up Page 3066 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Component Description The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air the greater the heat loss. Therefore the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. Page 4940 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagnostic Aids How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis NOTE: Trouble diagnosis indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnosis, read the "Preliminary Check", the "Symptom Chart" or the "Work Flow". 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis 1. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. 2. Questions and required results. Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage: Approximately 0 V -> Less than 1 V 3. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer